P.4 2015 - 2020

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 5 5 3 4 5 9 9 9 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) February/March 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (JC/JG) 187443/4
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
1 A rocket is launched vertically upwards from the ground. The rocket travels with uniform
acceleration from rest. After 8.0 s, the speed of the rocket is 120 m / s.
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the rocket.
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(b) (i) On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for the motion of the rocket in the first 8.0 s.
200
speed
m/s
150
100
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time / s
Fig. 1.1
[1]
(ii) Use the graph to determine the height of the rocket at 8.0 s.
height = ........................................................ [2]
(iii) From time = 8.0 s to time = 20.0 s, the rocket rises with increasing speed but with
decreasing acceleration.
From time = 20.0 s to time = 25.0 s, the rocket has a constant speed of less than 200 m / s.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for this motion. [3]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows an athlete crossing the finishing line in a race. As she crosses the finishing line, her
speed is 10.0 m / s. She slows down to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Fig. 2.1
(a) The mass of the athlete is 71 kg. Calculate the impulse applied to her as she slows down.
impulse = ........................................................ [3]
(b) (i) Define impulse in terms of force and time.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The athlete takes 1.2 s to slow down from a speed of 10.0 m / s to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Calculate the average resultant force applied to the athlete as she slows down.
force = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Calculate the force required to give a mass of 71 kg an acceleration of 6.4 m / s2.
force = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20 [Turn over
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a model of a wind turbine used to demonstrate the use of wind energy to generate
electricity. The wind is blowing towards the model, as shown.
turbine blades
circular area swept out

by turbine blades
wind
A
V
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades each
second is 7.5 kg. The kinetic energy of the air that passes through this circular area each
second is 240 J.
(i) Calculate the speed of the air.
speed = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) The kinetic energy of the air drives a generator. State the input power of the air passing
through the turbine blades.
input power = ........................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

5
(b) The output current of the generator is 2.0 A. The output potential difference (p.d.) of the
generator is 11 V.
(i) Calculate the output power of the generator.
output power = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the efficiency of the wind turbine.
efficiency = .................................................... % [2]
(c) The density of air is 1.3 kg / m3.

Calculate the volume of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades
each second.
volume = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]

6
4 (a) Define the specific latent heat of fusion of a substance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added to 0.35 kg of water. The initial temperature of the water is
24.5 °C. The temperature of the water decreases to 0 °C. The water loses 35 000 J of thermal
energy as it cools. All of the ice added to the water melts.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate:
(i) the specific heat capacity of water
specific heat capacity = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) the mass of ice added to the water.
mass = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

7
5 (a) Complete the sentences with words that describe the main process of thermal energy transfer
in each case.
A man goes for a walk on a cold day. He touches a metal gate, which removes thermal
energy from his hands by ................................. . He holds the sides of a cup containing a
hot drink. His hands gain thermal energy by ................................. . Some farm workers have
lit a fire. The man warms his hands by the side of the fire. His hands gain thermal energy by
................................. . [3]
(b) Describe in terms of particles the transfer of thermal energy through the metal of the gate
after transfer from the man’s hands.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a car on a sunny day in a hot country.
windscreen
object A
Fig. 5.1
The object labelled A is placed inside the windscreen. It is used by the owner of the car to
reduce the temperature rise of the air in the car.
Ring the most suitable material for the outer surface of object A. Explain your choice.
dull black dull white shiny black shiny white
explanation ................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a water wave moving from left to right in a harbour.
crest of wave
harbour wall
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw three more crests to the right of point A. [2]
(ii) State the name of the wave process that occurs as the wave passes point A.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the crests of another wave moving from left to right in a different part of the
harbour. This wave moves from deep water to shallow water.
deep water shallow water
crest of wave
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of movement of the wave after it has
passed into the shallow water. [1]
(ii) State the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes into the shallow water.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

9
(iii) Complete Table 6.1 to state whether each of the properties of the wave increases,
decreases or stays the same as the wave passes into the shallow water.
Table 6.1
property effect
wavelength
frequency
speed
[3]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and the image I formed when an object is placed to the left
of the lens. The principal focuses are labelled A and B and the centre of the lens is labelled C.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays to locate the position of the object.
Draw the object and label it O.
lens
A C B
I
Fig. 7.1
[3]
(ii) Ring all of the following distances that are equal to the focal length of the lens.
AB AC CB 2AB
[2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows green light passing through a triangular glass block.
Fig. 7.2
Red light enters the triangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.2 along the same path as the green
light.
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw the path of the red light within the triangular glass block. [1]
Fig. 7.3 shows green light passing through a rectangular glass block.
Red light enters the rectangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.3 along the same path as the
green light.
Fig. 7.3
On Fig. 7.3:
(ii) draw the path of the red light within the rectangular glass block [1]
(iii) draw the path of the red light after leaving the rectangular glass block. [1]
[Total: 8]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit.
12 V
A 3.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
X Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.1
The lamp has a resistance of 3.0 Ω. Line XY represents a uniform resistance wire of resistance
6.0 Ω.
(a) Calculate the reading on the ammeter.
ammeter reading = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

13
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows the circuit with a different connection to the resistance wire and an added
resistor. The length XY of the whole resistance wire is 2.0 m. The contact is made at Q where
the distance XQ is 0.60 m.
12 V
A 3.0 Ω
1.5 Ω 2.0 Ω
0.60 m
X Q Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.2
Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ........................................................ [4]
[Total: 6]

14
9 (a) State the name of the logic gate with the symbol shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.1
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the name of the logic gate with the truth table shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
input output
0 1
1 0
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit.
A C
E
B
Fig. 9.2
Complete the truth table in Table 9.2 for this circuit for all possible combinations of input.
Table 9.2
A B C D E
1 1
1 0
1 0
0 0
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

15
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 is a simplified top view of a flat coil. There is an alternating current (a.c.) in the coil.
Fig. 10.1
Describe the magnetic effect of this alternating current.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a pan placed above the coil. The base of the pan is made of steel.
pan
coil
Fig. 10.2
State what quantity is induced in the base of the pan.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The pan contains water.
State and explain the effect of the quantity induced in part (b) on the temperature of the water
in the pan.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

16
11 (a) The isotope hydrogen-1 has a proton number of 1 and a nucleon number of 1.
Two isotopes of helium are helium-3 and helium-4.
Helium-3 has a proton number of 2 and a nucleon number of 3.
Helium-4 has a nucleon number of 4.
Complete Table 11.1 for neutral atoms of these isotopes of helium.
Table 11.1
helium-3 helium-4
number of neutrons
number of electrons
mass compared to a neutral

atom of hydrogen-1
[3]
(b) An experiment takes place in a laboratory shielded from all background radiation. A sample
of radioactive material is wrapped in aluminium foil of thickness 0.1 mm. A detector of ionising
radiation placed 1 cm from the foil records a reading.
A piece of aluminium of thickness 5 mm is placed between the detector and the foil. The
detector reading drops to zero.
State and explain any type of radiation passing through the aluminium foil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 4 5 4 8 7 2 4 9 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 194261/3
2
1 An aeroplane of mass 2.5 × 105 kg lands with a speed of 62 m / s, on a horizontal runway at time
t = 0. The aeroplane decelerates uniformly as it travels along the runway in a straight line until it
reaches a speed of 6.0 m / s at t = 35 s.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the deceleration of the aeroplane in the 35 s after it lands
deceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the aeroplane as it decelerates
force = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) the momentum of the aeroplane when its speed is 6.0 m / s.
momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(b) At t = 35 s, the aeroplane stops decelerating and moves along the runway at a constant speed
of 6.0 m / s for a further 15 s.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch the shape of the graph for the distance travelled by the aeroplane along
the runway between t = 0 and t = 50 s. You are not required to calculate distance values.
distance
0
0 35 50
time / s
Fig. 1.1
[3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

3
(c) As the aeroplane decelerates, its kinetic energy decreases.
Suggest what happens to this energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is the extension–load graph for a light spring S.
30
extension / cm
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
load / N
Fig. 2.1
(a) State the range of loads for which S obeys Hooke’s law.
from ....................................................... to .......................................................... [1]
(b) Using information from Fig. 2.1, determine the spring constant k of spring S.
k = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

5
(c) A second spring, identical to spring S, is attached to spring S. The two springs are attached
to a rod, as shown in Fig. 2.2. A load of 4.0 N is suspended from the bottom of spring S. The
arrangement is in equilibrium.
rod
second spring
spring S
4.0 N load
Fig. 2.2
(i) State the name of the form of energy stored in the two springs when they are stretched.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Determine the extension of the arrangement in Fig. 2.2.
extension = ................................................... cm [1]
(iii) The load is carefully increased to 6.0 N in total.
Calculate the distance moved by the load to the new equilibrium position as the load
increases from 4.0 N to 6.0 N.
distance moved = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows gas trapped in the sealed end of a tube by a dense liquid.
open end
sealed
trapped gas end
cm3
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
dense liquid
Fig. 3.1
The scale marked on the sealed end of the tube is calibrated to read the volume of gas trapped
above the liquid surface. Fig. 3.1 shows that initially the volume V1 of the gas is 60 cm3.
The pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
(a) State how Fig. 3.1 shows that the pressure of the trapped gas is equal to the pressure of the
atmosphere.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain, in terms of the momentum of its molecules, why the trapped gas exerts a pressure
on the walls of the tube.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

7
(c) More of the dense liquid is poured into the open end of the tube. The level of the liquid surface
in both the sealed and the open ends of the tube rises as shown in Fig. 3.2. The temperature
of the trapped gas and atmospheric pressure both remain constant.
open end
15 cm
sealed
trapped gas end
cm3
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
dense liquid
Fig. 3.2
(i) In the sealed end of the tube, the volume V2 of the trapped gas is 50 cm3. In the open
end of the tube, the liquid surface is 15 cm above the new level in the sealed tube.
Calculate the pressure p2 of the trapped gas.
pressure p2 = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the density of the liquid in the tube.
density = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

8
4 Water has a specific heat capacity of 4200 J / (kg °C) and a boiling point of 100 °C.
(a) State what is meant by boiling point.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A mass of 0.30 kg of water at its boiling point is poured into a copper container which is
initially at 11 °C. After a few seconds, the temperature of the container and the water are both
95 °C.
(i) Calculate the energy transferred from the water.
energy transferred = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the thermal capacity of the copper container.
thermal capacity of the copper container = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Water from the container evaporates and the temperature of the remaining water
decreases slowly.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why evaporation causes the temperature of the remaining
water to decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

9
5 The distance between the centre of a thin converging lens and each principal focus is 5.0 cm.
(a) Describe what is meant by the term principal focus for a thin converging lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The lens is used as a magnifying glass to produce an image I of an object O.
(i) Underline the terms that describe the nature of the image produced by a magnifying
glass. [2]
diminished enlarged inverted real same size upright virtual
(ii) Fig. 5.1 is a full-scale diagram of the lens and the image I.
centre of lens
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 5.1 (full-scale)
1. On Fig. 5.1, mark both principal focuses and label each of them F. [1]
2. By drawing on Fig. 5.1, find the position of object O and add object O to the diagram.
[3]
(iii) Using Fig. 5.1, determine the distance of object O from the centre of the lens.
distance = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

10
6 The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.
(a) Calculate the range of wavelengths for sounds that are audible by a healthy human ear.
wavelengths range from ................................. to ................................. [2]
(b) Sound waves are longitudinal waves.
Describe how a longitudinal wave differs from a transverse wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Fig. 6.1 shows a band in front of a building.
Fig. 6.1
The drum produces a low frequency sound. Other musical instruments produce a high
frequency sound. These sounds are equally loud.
A young man at the side of the building hears the drum but not the high frequency sounds
from the other musical instruments.
Explain why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

11
7 An electromagnet consists of a solenoid X that is made of copper wire. The solenoid contains an
iron core.
(a) Explain why:
(i) the structure of copper makes it a suitable material for the wire
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) iron is a suitable material for the core of an electromagnet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows the electromagnet inside a second solenoid Y.
terminals of Y
solenoid X iron core
solenoid Y
a.c. power supply
Fig. 7.1
(i) Describe and explain what happens in solenoid Y when solenoid X is connected to an
alternating current (a.c.) power supply.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) A switch and a lamp are connected in series with the terminals of solenoid Y. When the
switch is closed, the lamp lights up at normal brightness.
Describe and explain what happens to the current in solenoid X when the switch is
closed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
12
8 The power supply used in an electric vehicle contains 990 rechargeable cells each of electromotive
force (e.m.f.) 1.2 V.
The cells are contained in packs in which all the cells are in series with each other. The e.m.f. of
each pack is 54 V.
(a) Calculate the number of packs in the power supply.
number of packs = ......................................................... [2]
(b) When in use, each pack supplies a current of 3.5 A.
(i) Calculate the rate at which each cell is transferring chemical energy to electrical energy.
rate of energy transfer = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The packs are connected in parallel to supply a large current to drive the electric vehicle.
Explain why it is necessary to use thick wires to carry this current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

13
9 (a) Describe how a digital signal differs from an analogue signal. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) In the appropriate box, draw the symbol for an AND gate and the symbol for an OR gate.
AND gate OR gate
[1]
(ii) State how the behaviour of an AND gate differs from that of an OR gate.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

14
(c) An arrangement of logic gates A, B and C is shown in Fig. 9.1. The arrangement has two
inputs, X and Y and two outputs P and Q.
X B
P
Y
Fig. 9.1
Output P of logic gate B has logic state 1 (high).
(i) Determine the logic states of the two inputs of logic gate B.
upper input = ...............................................................
lower input = ...............................................................

[1]
(ii) Determine and explain the logic state of output Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
logic state of Q = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

15
10 Fig. 10.1 represents a neutral atom of an isotope of element X.
Fig. 10.1
(a) State one similarity between this atom and a neutral atom of a different isotope of element X.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The isotope of element X is radioactive. It decays to form an isotope of element Y by emitting
a β-particle.
(i) Using Fig. 10.1 deduce the nuclide notation for the isotope of Y produced by this decay.
......
nuclide notation:
...... Y [3]
(ii) β-particles ionise the air they pass through less strongly than the same number of
α-particles.
Suggest why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 1 2 0 4 7 0 8 0 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 194263/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed–time graph of a person on a journey.
On the journey, he walks and then waits for a bus. He then travels by bus. He gets off the bus and
waits for two minutes. He then walks again. His journey takes 74 minutes.
50
speed
km / h
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
time / min
Fig. 1.1
(a) For the whole journey calculate:
(i) the distance travelled
distance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) the average speed.
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

3
(b) State and explain which feature of a speed–time graph shows acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State and explain the acceleration of the person at time = 40 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a train.
Fig. 2.1
The total mass of the train and its passengers is 750 000 kg. The train is travelling at a speed of
84 m / s. The driver applies the brakes and the train takes 80 s to slow down to a speed of 42 m / s.
(a) Calculate the impulse applied to the train as it slows down.
impulse = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate the average resultant force applied to the train as it slows down.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest how the shape of the train helps it to travel at high speeds.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The train took 80 s to reduce its speed from 84 m / s to 42 m / s. Explain why, with the same
braking force, the train takes more than 80 s to reduce its speed from 42 m / s to zero.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) On a wet day, the train travels a greater distance before it stops along the same track. The
train has the same speed of 84 m / s before the brakes are applied.
Suggest a reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20
5
3 (a) A solar panel receives energy from the Sun at a rate of 5.0 kW.
Thermal energy is transferred from the solar panel to water with an efficiency of 20%.
Cold water of mass 15 kg enters the solar panel every hour.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the temperature increase of the water.
temperature increase = .....................................................°C [4]
(b) State and explain one advantage and one disadvantage of heating the water in a solar panel
compared with heating the water in a coal-burning boiler.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 8]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer without a temperature scale.

The liquid inside the thermometer has a melting point of –39 °C.
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe simple experiments to mark the positions of the fixed points on this liquid-in-glass
thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A scientist is measuring temperatures at the South Pole. These temperatures have a minimum
value of –90 °C.
State why the liquid used in the thermometer in Fig. 4.1 would not be suitable for this scientist.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State a design change that:
(i) increases the sensitivity of a liquid-in-glass thermometer
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) increases the range of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) State the property of the liquid which ensures that the scale on a liquid-in-glass thermometer
is linear.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

7
5 Fig. 5.1 shows crests of a wave approaching a barrier where the wave is reflected.
direction of travel of wave
crest
barrier
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw three crests of the reflected wave. [3]
(b) The wave has a wavelength of 36 cm and a speed of 1.2 m / s.
Calculate the frequency of the wave.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
(c) Complete the following sentences.
An echo is the name for a reflected .................................................................. wave.
The waves that form an echo are a type of longitudinal wave. Longitudinal waves are made
up of .................................................................. and rarefactions.

[2]
[Total: 8]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows an arrangement of glass prisms inside a box. The angles of the prisms are
45°, 45° and 90°.
box
prism 1
incident
ray of light
wall prism 2
eye
Fig. 6.1 (not to scale)
This is a device used to view objects that are behind a wall.

The incident ray of light undergoes total internal reflection in the prisms.
On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the device and show the ray as it emerges
from the box. [3]
(b) Show that the refractive index of glass with a critical angle of 45° is 1.41.
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

9
7 (a) A student makes a transformer that uses an alternating current (a.c.) supply with an
electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12.0 V to induce an output potential difference (p.d.) of 2.0 V.
The student is provided with two lengths of insulated wire and the U-shaped piece of iron
shown in Fig. 7.1.
iron
Fig. 7.1
(i) Complete and label Fig. 7.1 to show the transformer connected to the supply and the
output from the transformer. [3]
(ii) Explain the function of the piece of iron in the transformer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The output of the transformer is connected to a lamp. The current in the lamp is 100 mA.
The transformer is 100% efficient.
Calculate the input current to the transformer.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Another transformer is used in a school laboratory to step down a mains supply with a p.d. of
110 V to 12 V. This transformer is mounted in a metal case.
State and explain an essential safety feature required for this arrangement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

10
8 (a) A light-emitting diode (LED) is a diode that emits light when there is a current in it. Draw a
circuit diagram showing an LED, connected so that it is lit, in series with a battery and a fixed
resistor. Use standard electrical symbols.
[4]
(b) The p.d. across the LED when lit is 3.1 V and the current in the LED is 0.030 A.
Calculate the value of the resistance of the LED when lit.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows a power supply of e.m.f. 10.5 V connected in series with a lamp and a heater.
The p.d. across the lamp is 2.1 V and the current in the lamp is 1.5 A.
Fig. 8.1
Calculate:
(i) the resistance of the heater
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the power of the heater.
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20
11
9 (a) Complete the truth table shown in Table 9.1 for a NAND gate.
Table 9.1
input 1 input 2 output

0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[1]
(b) The circuit shown in Fig. 9.1 contains two different types of gate, labelled X and Y.
A C
X
B
X E
Y D
Fig. 9.1
Table 9.2 shows a partially completed truth table for this circuit.
Table 9.2
input intermediate point output

A B C D E
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
(i) From Table 9.2, deduce the name of logic gate Y.
Ring your answer from the list.
AND NAND NOR NOT OR [1]
(ii) Complete the truth table in Table 9.2. [2]
(c) There is a current of 3.0 A in a copper wire. Calculate how many electrons pass through the
copper wire every 60 s. The charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
number of electrons = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a vacuum tube with a radioactive source. The radioactive source emits α-particles,
β-particles and γ -rays. There is a very strong magnetic field between the N pole and the S pole of
the magnet.
lead cylinder with narrow
vacuum central hole
radioactive source
N
S
α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays
Fig. 10.1
(a) The lead cylinder has a narrow central hole. State and explain the effect of the lead cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Describe the paths of the α-particles, β-particles and γ -rays as they pass through the magnetic
field. Explain your answers.
(i) α-particles
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) β-particles
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) γ -rays
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 4 0 8 5 1 2 0 6 3 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 194262/3
2
1 (a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows two speed–time graphs, A and B, and two distance–time graphs, C and D.
speed speed
A
B
0 0
0 time 0 time
distance distance
C
D
0 0
0 time 0 time
Fig. 1.1
Describe the motion shown by:
(i) graph A ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) graph B ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) graph C .............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) graph D. ............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

3
2 A scientist fills a container with sea water. The container has dimensions 30 cm × 30 cm × 40 cm.
The density of sea water is 1020 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the sea water in the container.
mass = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a submarine. The submarine is fully submerged in the sea.
hatch
top surface
submarine
Fig. 2.1
(i) The atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa and the total pressure on the top surface of the
submarine is 500 kPa.
Calculate the depth of the top surface of the submarine below the surface of the sea.
depth = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) A hatch (an opening door) on the top surface of the submarine has an area of 0.62 m2.
Calculate the downward force on the hatch due to the total pressure on the top surface
of the submarine.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

4
3 In a double-decker bus there are two passenger compartments, one above the other.
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a double-decker bus on a tilted platform.
top compartment
bottom compartment
platform
angle
Fig. 3.1
The platform is used to test the stability of the bus.
The angle the bus makes with the horizontal is gradually increased until the bus begins to
topple to the left.
Explain why the bus begins to topple.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) There are 30 passengers in the upper compartment of the bus and 2 passengers in the
bottom compartment of the bus.
State how this affects the stability of the bus and the reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

5
(c) A bus is travelling along a straight road. The bus and the driver have a combined mass of
16 000 kg when there are no passengers in it. The bus has 73 passengers. The average
mass of each of the passengers is 65 kg.
(i) Calculate the total mass of the bus, the driver and the 73 passengers.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The fully loaded bus accelerates uniformly from rest to a speed of 14 m / s. The time
taken to reach a speed of 14 m / s is 20 s.
Calculate the resultant force on the bus during the acceleration.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

6
4 (a) Describe, in terms of molecules, what happens when a liquid evaporates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows wet clothes drying on a washing line in an outside area.
washing line
Fig. 4.1
State two changes in the weather that help the wet clothes to dry more quickly.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

7
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a plastic cup. The cup contains sand, an electric heater and a thermometer.
thermometer
electric
plastic heater
cup sand
Fig. 5.1
The power of the heater is 50 W. The mass of the sand in the cup is 550 g. The initial
temperature of the sand is 20 °C. The heater is switched on for 2.0 minutes. The temperature
is recorded until the temperature stops increasing. The highest temperature recorded by the
thermometer is 33 °C.
(i) Calculate the energy supplied by the heater.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate a value for the specific heat capacity of the sand, using your answer to (a)(i)
and the data in the question.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain why the specific heat capacity of sand may be different from the value calculated
in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
(b) On a sunny day, the temperature of the sand on a beach is much higher than the temperature
of the sea.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of a thermocouple thermometer.
[3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

9
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a sound wave after reflection from a solid surface.
direction
of travel of
reflected
wave
solid surface
Fig. 6.1
On Fig. 6.1, draw three crests of the incident wave. [3]
(b) Tick four statements in the list below that are false for a sound wave that is audible to a
healthy human ear.
The wave is longitudinal.
The wave is transverse.
The frequency of the wave is 1 Hz.
The frequency of the wave is 1 kHz.
The frequency of the wave is 1 MHz.
The wave travels in a vacuum.
The wave could travel in aluminium.

[3]
(c) State a typical value for the speed of a sound wave in water.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows red light travelling from air into a prism made of diamond. The path of the red light
is incomplete.
A
y
x
40°
ray of
red light
diamond
(a) The refractive index of diamond is 2.42.
Calculate angle x.
angle x = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain the term total internal reflection.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The angle y is greater than the critical angle of diamond.
On Fig. 7.1, draw the path of the red light through and out of the prism after point A. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

11
8 (a) (i) Describe what is meant by an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what is meant by the direction of an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a polystyrene ball covered with aluminium paint. The polystyrene ball is
suspended between two charged metal plates by an insulated thread.
insulated thread
negatively charged
metal plate
positively
charged
metal plate polystyrene ball
covered with
aluminium paint
Fig. 8.1
The ball oscillates between the two charged plates.
Explain why the ball oscillates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) There is a current of 0.29 A in an electrical circuit.
Calculate the time taken for a charge of 15 C to flow through the electrical circuit.
time = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) electric motor. The coil rotates about the axis when
there is a current in the coil. The coil is connected to the rest of the circuit by the brushes.
axis
coil
S
N
brush
brush
+ –
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.1, draw a pair of arrows to show which way the coil rotates. Explain the direction
you have chosen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the direction in which electrons flow through the coil.
[1]
(iii) Explain why the electrons flow in the direction you have shown in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

13
(b) State any difference each of the following changes makes to the rotation of the coil in
Fig. 9.1:
(i) changing the polarity of the power supply to that shown in Fig. 9.2
– +
Fig. 9.2
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) changing the coil to the new coil shown in Fig. 9.3
original coil new coil
Fig. 9.3
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) using a stronger magnetic field.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) A radioactive nucleus of carbon decays to a nucleus of nitrogen by emitting a particle.
Complete the nuclide equation and state the name of the particle.
14 C 14 N + ..... X
6 7 .....
name of particle X …………………………………………….. [3]
(b) A radiation detector in a laboratory records a reading of 10 counts / min. There are no
radioactive samples in the laboratory.
(i) Explain why the radiation detector records a reading and suggest a possible source.
explanation ....................................................
source ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Carbon-14 has a half-life of 5700 years. There are atoms of carbon-14 in all living
organisms.
An archaeologist digs up some ancient wood. In the same laboratory as in (b)(i), a

sample of this ancient wood gives a reading of 20 counts / min. An equivalent sample of
living wood gives a reading of 80 counts / min. It is suggested that the age of the ancient
sample is 11 400 years.
Do a calculation to check whether this suggestion is correct.
[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 6 0 9 2 5 3 1 2 4 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.

Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (ST/CT) 167383/5
2
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the distance-time graph for the journey of a cyclist.
350
300
distance / m
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) Describe the motion of the cyclist in the time between:
1. time = 0 and time = 15 s
...........................................................................................................................................
2. time = 15 s and time = 30 s
...........................................................................................................................................
3. time = 30 s and time = 40 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Calculate, for the 40 s journey:
1. the average speed
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
2. the maximum speed.
maximum speed = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19
3
2 (a) State one advantage and one disadvantage of using a wind turbine as a source of electrical
energy.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a wind turbine.
wind speed
16 m / s
area swept out by

the turbine blades
Fig. 2.1
(i) The wind blows at a speed of 16 m / s towards the turbine blades. In one second, a
volume of 24 000 m3 of air passes through the circular area swept out by the blades. The
density of air is 1.3 kg / m3.
Calculate:
1. the mass of air that passes through the circular area swept out by the blades in 1.0 s
mass = ......................................................... [2]
2. the kinetic energy of the mass of air that passes through the area swept out by the
blades.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest why some of the kinetic energy of the air that passes through the circular area
swept out by the blades is not converted into electrical energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
4
3 (a) An object is moving in a straight line at constant speed.
State three ways in which a force may change the motion of the object.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
3 ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows an object suspended from two ropes. The weight of the object is 360 N. The
magnitude of the tension in each rope is T.
T T
45° 45°
object
360 N
Fig. 3.1
In the space below, determine the tension T by drawing a vector diagram of the forces acting
on the object.
State the scale you have used.
scale ...............................................................
T = ...............................................................
[5]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19
5
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a mercury barometer. The tube containing the mercury is vertical.
mercury
Fig. 4.1
(i) The height h indicates a value of the atmospheric pressure.
State what is contained in the space labelled S.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On a particular day the atmospheric pressure is 1.02 × 105 Pa. The density of mercury
is 13 600 kg / m3.
Calculate the value of h indicated by the barometer.
h = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) The tube containing mercury is now tilted so that it makes an angle of 10° with the
vertical. After tilting, there continues to be a space above the mercury in the tube.
State and explain whether the vertical height of mercury in the tube is smaller, the same,
or greater than the value calculated in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Another mercury barometer in the same room at the same time shows a lower value of h than
the barometer in (a).
Suggest and explain a reason for the lower value.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
6
5 (a) State the values of the fixed points of a temperature scale.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) The graduations on a liquid-in-glass thermometer are equally spaced.
For the equal spacing of the graduations to be correct, state:
1. an assumption that is made about the liquid in the thermometer
...........................................................................................................................................
2. an assumption that is made about the structure of the thermometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Liquid-in-glass thermometer A has a greater range than liquid-in-glass thermometer B.
State one way the design of thermometer A is different from thermometer B.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Liquid-in-glass thermometer C has a greater sensitivity than liquid-in-glass thermometer D.
State one way the design of thermometer C is different from thermometer D.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

7
(c) (i) In the space provided, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple thermometer.
[3]
(ii) Suggest when a thermocouple thermometer is more suitable than a liquid-in-glass

thermometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

8
6 An electrical heater is placed on the floor of a room in a house. The heater is switched on.
(a) State the main process by which thermal energy is transferred to the air in all parts of the
room.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The heater has a power of 1.5 kW. The air in the room has a mass of 65 kg. The specific heat
capacity of air is 720 J / (kg °C).
(i) Calculate the time it takes for this heater to raise the temperature of the air in the room
from 8.0 °C to 15.0 °C.
time = ......................................................... [4]
(ii) State two reasons why the time calculated in (b)(i) is smaller than the actual time taken
to raise the temperature of the air in the room from 8.0 °C to 15.0 °C.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

9
7 (a) In Fig. 7.1, the small circles represent molecules. The arrows refer to the change of state
from the arrangement of molecules on the left to the arrangement of molecules on the right.
Fig. 7.1
Complete the following by writing solid, liquid or gas in each of the blank spaces.
1. Change of state X is from ............................................ to ............................................ .
2. Change of state Y is from ............................................ to ............................................ .

[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of the forces between their molecules, why gases expand more than solids
when they undergo the same rise in temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A cylinder of volume 0.012 m3 contains a compressed gas at a pressure of 1.8 × 106 Pa.
A valve is opened and all the compressed gas escapes from the cylinder into the atmosphere.
The temperature of the gas does not change.
Calculate the volume that the escaped gas occupies at the atmospheric pressure
of 1.0 × 105 Pa.
volume = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 7]
10
8 Fig. 8.1 shows parallel wavefronts of a light wave in ice. The wavefronts are incident on a boundary
with air.
direction
of wave
ice
air
Fig. 8.1
The speed of the light wave in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s. The refractive index of the ice is 1.3.
(a) On Fig. 8.1:
(i) draw the wavefronts of the wave that passes into the air [3]
(ii) draw arrows to show the direction of travel of the refracted wave [1]
(iii) label the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r. [1]
(b) Calculate the speed of the light wave in the ice.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

11
BLANK PAGE

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows current-potential difference (p.d.) graphs for a resistor and for a thermistor.
6.0
current / A
4.0
resistor
2.0 thermistor
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
p.d. / V
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the resistance of the thermistor when the p.d. across it is 7.0 V.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(b) In Table 9.1, tick the boxes that indicate the effect on the resistances of the resistor and of the
thermistor when the p.d. across them is increased from 0 to 7.0 V.
Table 9.1
component resistance increases resistance is constant resistance decreases

resistor
thermistor
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

13
(c) The thermistor and the resistor are connected in parallel to a 7.0 V supply.
Calculate:
(i) the current from the supply
current = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the energy transferred from the supply in 5.0 minutes.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) The electrical energy produced by a power station is transmitted over long distances at a very
high voltage.
Explain why a very high voltage is used.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 10.1 represents a transformer.
core
4000
120 V P turns S 9.0 V
Fig. 10.1
(i) The primary coil P has 4000 turns and an input of 120 V. The secondary coil S has an
output of 9.0 V.
Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.
number = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) State a suitable material for the core of the transformer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

15
11 (a) (i) One isotope of iridium-194 is represented by

194
Ir
77
This isotope decays by β-emission to a stable isotope of platinum (Pt).
Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
194 ...... ......

Ir Pt + β
77 ...... ...... [3]
(ii) The half-life of iridium-194 is 19 hours. A sample of iridium-194 has an initial count-rate
of 1100 counts / min.
Calculate the count-rate from this sample after 38 hours.
count-rate = ......................................................... [2]
(b) State two ways in which γ-emission differs from β-emission.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

* 4 7 0 2 7 0 2 2 7 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (KS/TP) 169309/4
2
1 A rocket is stationary on the launchpad. At time t = 0, the rocket engines are switched on and
exhaust gases are ejected from the nozzles of the engines. The rocket accelerates upwards.
Fig. 1.1 shows how the acceleration of the rocket varies between time t = 0 and time t = tf.
acceleration
0
0 tf
time t
Fig. 1.1
(a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 1.2, sketch a graph to show how the speed of the rocket varies between time t = 0
and time t = tf.
speed
0
0 tf
time t
Fig. 1.2
[3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

3
(c) Some time later, the rocket is far from the Earth. The effect of the Earth’s gravity on the
motion of the rocket is insignificant. As the rocket accelerates, its momentum increases.
(i) State the principle of the conservation of momentum.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the principle of the conservation of momentum applies to the accelerating
rocket and the exhaust gases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a sign that extends over a road.
support post
ACCIDENT
SLOW DOWN
sign
1.8 m
concrete
block W
1.3 m
P
70 cm
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the sign is 3.4 × 103 kg.
(a) Calculate the weight W of the sign.
W = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The weight of the sign acts at a horizontal distance of 1.8 m from the centre of the support
post and it produces a turning effect about point P.
Point P is a horizontal distance of 1.3 m from the centre of the support post.
(i) Calculate the moment about P due to the weight of the sign.
moment = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

5
(ii) A concrete block is positioned on the other side of the support post with its centre of
mass a horizontal distance of 70 cm from the centre of the support post.
1. State what is meant by centre of mass.
....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. The weight of the concrete block produces a moment about point P that exactly
cancels the moment caused by the weight W.
Calculate the weight of the concrete block.
weight = ......................................................... [2]
(c) The concrete block is removed. The sign and support post rotate about point P in a clockwise
direction.
State and explain what happens to the moment about point P due to the weight of the sign as
it rotates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

6
3 A cube of side 0.040 m is floating in a container of liquid. Fig. 3.1 shows that the surface of the
liquid is 0.028 m above the level of the bottom face of the cube.
air
cube 0.040 m
liquid
0.028 m
valve
pump
Fig. 3.1
The pressure of the air above the cube exerts a force on the top face of the cube. The valve is
closed.
(a) Explain, in terms of air molecules, how the force due to the pressure of the air is produced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The density of the liquid in the container is 1500 kg / m3.
Calculate:
(i) the pressure due to the liquid at a depth of 0.028 m
pressure = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the force on the bottom face of the cube caused by the pressure due to the liquid.
force = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

7
(c) The valve is opened and liquid is pumped into the container. The surface of the liquid rises a
distance of 0.034 m.
The cube remains floating in the liquid with its bottom face 0.028 m below the surface of the
liquid.
(i) Calculate the work done on the cube by the force in (b)(ii).
work done = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest one reason why this is not an efficient method of lifting up the cube.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

8
4 Gas of mass 0.23 g is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. The gas is at atmospheric pressure which
is 1.0 × 105 Pa. Fig. 4.1 shows the piston held in position by a catch.
gas cylinder
air at atmospheric
pressure
piston
heater catch
Fig. 4.1
The volume of the trapped gas is 1.9 × 10–4 m3.
An electrical heater is used to increase the temperature of the trapped gas by 550 °C.
(a) The specific heat capacity of the gas is 0.72 J / (g °C).
(i) Calculate the energy required to increase the temperature of the trapped gas by 550 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The power of the heater is 2.4 W.
1. Calculate how long it takes for the heater to supply the energy calculated in (a)(i).
time = ......................................................... [2]
2. In practice, it takes much longer to increase the temperature of the gas by 550 °C
using the heater.
Suggest one reason for this.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

9
(b) When the temperature of the gas has increased by 550 °C, its pressure is 2.9 × 105 Pa. The
catch is then released allowing the piston to move. As the piston moves, the temperature of
the gas remains constant.
(i) State and explain what happens to the piston.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Determine the volume of the gas when the piston stops moving.
volume = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

10
5 Liquids and gases are two states of matter.
(a) In both boiling and evaporation, a liquid changes into a gas.
(i) State two ways in which boiling differs from evaporation.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Before injecting a patient, a doctor wipes a small amount of a volatile liquid on to the
patient’s skin.
Explain, in terms of molecules, how this procedure cools the patient’s skin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Gases can be compressed but liquids are incompressible.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why liquids are incompressible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

11
BLANK PAGE

12
6 Green light of frequency 5.7 × 1014 Hz is travelling in air at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s. The light is
incident on the surface of a transparent solid.
Fig. 6.1 shows the wavefronts and the direction of travel of the light in the air.
wavefront
air
solid
Fig. 6.1
The light travels more slowly in the transparent solid.
(a) Explain, in terms of the wavefronts, why the light changes direction as it enters the solid. You
may draw on Fig. 6.1 as part of your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The refractive index of the transparent solid is 1.3.
(i) The light is incident on the surface of the solid at an angle of incidence of 67°.
Calculate the angle of refraction of the light in the solid.
angle of refraction = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

13
(ii) Determine the wavelength of the green light in the transparent solid.
wavelength = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 9]

14
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit diagram that includes component X.
A
X
20 Ω
30 Ω
Fig. 7.1
(a) State the name of component X.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is E. The switch is closed.
The potential difference (p.d.) across the 30 Ω resistor is V30.

The p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor is V20.
The p.d. across component X is VX.
State an equation that relates VX to:
(i) V30
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) E and V20.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

15
(c) The e.m.f. of the battery is 6.0 V and the resistance of component X is 15 Ω.
Calculate:
(i) the total resistance of the circuit
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) the ammeter reading.
reading = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The temperature of component X increases.
State and explain what happens to the ammeter reading.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

16
8 A student turns the handle of an alternating current (a.c.) generator and the coil rotates.
Fig. 8.1 represents the structure of the a.c. generator.
handle
coil
N S
slip rings
coil
voltage
output
brush
Fig. 8.1
(a) There is an alternating voltage output between the two terminals.
(i) Explain why rotating the coil produces an output voltage.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State the position of the rotating coil when the alternating output voltage is at a maximum
value and explain why the maximum output occurs at this position.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

17
(b) A lamp and an open switch are connected in series to the output terminals of the a.c.
generator.
The switch is closed and the lamp lights up. The student has to apply a greater force on the
handle.
Explain why a greater force is needed to keep the lamp lit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

18
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a beam of α-particles moving towards a thin sheet of gold in a vacuum.
gold sheet
beam of α-particles
detectors
vacuum
Fig. 9.1
Detectors in the region surrounding the thin gold sheet detect the α-particles and determine
the number of particles that travel in various directions.
State and explain what can be deduced from the following observations.
(i) The majority of the α-particles pass through the gold sheet undeflected and are detected
on the far side.
deduction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) A small number of α-particles are deflected as they pass through the gold sheet.
deduction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) A very small number of α-particles are deflected through very large angles or return back
the way they came.
deduction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

19
(b) A beam that consists of both α-particles and β-particles is passed through a region of space
where there is a magnetic field perpendicular to the direction of the beam.
State two ways in which the deflection of the α-particles differs from that of the β-particles.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

* 3 3 7 6 1 2 0 8 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (CE/FC) 169310/4
2
1 A bus is travelling between points A and D. There are bus stops at A, B, C and D but the bus does
not stop at B and C. Fig. 1.1 is a speed-time graph for the bus.
B C
40
speed
km / h 30
20
10
A D
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / min
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the motion of the bus between each of the bus stops. Select the appropriate
description from the list below.
constant acceleration decreasing acceleration
increasing acceleration moving backwards at constant speed
moving forwards at constant speed stationary
1. between A and B ..............................................................................
2. between B and C ..............................................................................
3. between C and D .............................................................................

[3]
(b) The average speed of the bus between A and D is 23 km / h.
Calculate the distance between A and D.
distance = ........................................................ [3]
(c) The bus stops at D for 1 min and then travels at a constant acceleration for 30 seconds.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a possible graph for this additional motion. Label X when the bus starts to
accelerate and label Y for 30 seconds later. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a model fire engine. Its brakes are applied.
model fire engine

containing water tank
jet of water
FIRE
Fig. 2.1
0.80 kg of water is emitted in the jet every 6.0 s at a velocity of 0.72 m / s relative to the model.
(a) Calculate the change in momentum of the water that is ejected in 6.0 s.
momentum = ........................................................ [2]
(b) Calculate the magnitude of the force acting on the model because of the jet of water.
force = ........................................................ [2]
(c) The brakes of the model are released.
State and explain the direction of the acceleration of the model.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) In (c) the model contains a water tank, which is initially full.
State and explain any change in the magnitude of the initial acceleration if the brakes are first
released when the tank is nearly empty.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows solar cells used to generate electrical energy.
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the main form of energy transferred from the Sun to the solar cells for the generation of
electrical energy.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Consider the generation of electrical energy by a large number of solar cells, as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
(i) State one environmental advantage and one environmental disadvantage.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State and explain whether this source of electrical energy is renewable.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

5
(c) Each group of solar cells is arranged in a rectangle 1.2 m × 2.8 m. The solar cells are situated
in a region where 260 W of solar energy is received per square metre of the cells. The
electrical output of each group of solar cells is a current of 2.5 A with a potential difference of
86 V.
Calculate the efficiency of the solar cells.
efficiency = .................................................... % [4]
[Total: 8]

6
4 (a) State and explain, in terms of molecules, any change in the pressure of a gas when the
volume is reduced at a constant temperature.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Complete Table 4.1 to give the relative order of magnitude of the expansion of gases, liquids
and solids for the same increase of temperature.
Write one of these words in each blank space:
gas liquid solid
Table 4.1
expands most
expands least
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

7
5 (a) (i) A liquid is heated so that bubbles of its vapour rise to the surface and molecules escape
to the atmosphere.
State the name of this process .................................................................................... [1]
(ii) At a lower temperature than in (a)(i), molecules escape from the surface to the
atmosphere.
State the name of this process .................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Fig. 5.1 shows apparatus used to determine the power output of a heater.
thermometer
electric heater
metal block
Fig. 5.1
The metal block has a mass of 2.7 kg. The metal of the block has a specific heat capacity
of 900 J / (kg °C).
In 2 min 30 s, the temperature of the block increases from 21 °C to 39 °C.
Calculate the power of the heater.
power = ........................................................ [4]
(ii) State and explain a precaution that can be taken to improve the accuracy of the
experiment.
Statement ..........................................................................................................................
Explanation .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a water wave in a ripple tank.
new wave
direction
original
wave
direction
region B
region A
Fig. 6.1
(i) State the name of the process that occurs as the wave moves from region A to region B.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest a cause for the change in direction of the wave.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

9
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a transverse wave.
displacement
0
time
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw a wave which has half the amplitude and a greater frequency than the wave
shown. [2]
(c) A train travels along steel rails. A person waiting at a station hears the sound of the train
through the rails before he hears the sound through the air.
(i) Explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The speed of sound in the rails is 5800 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of sound of frequency 1100 Hz travelling at this speed.
wavelength = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 7]

10
7 (a) In Fig. 7.1, a converging lens projects a sharp image of an object O on to a screen.
Complete the paths of the two rays from the object to the screen.
converging lens
screen
Fig. 7.1 [2]
(b) The converging lens in (a) is replaced with a thinner converging lens. The object O and the
screen remain in the same positions as in (a). The thinner converging lens has a longer focal
length than the converging lens in (a).
Complete the paths of the two rays from the object to the screen in Fig. 7.2.
thinner converging lens

screen
Fig. 7.2 [2]
(c) A converging lens is used as a magnifying glass.

The focal length of the lens is 10 cm.
(i) Describe the position of the object in relation to the lens.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the position of the image in relation to the lens and the object.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give three properties of the image formed by a magnifying glass.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19
11
8 (a) A conducting sphere is mounted on an insulating stand. Explain how you would use a
positively charged rod of insulating material to charge the sphere by induction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows an electronic component.
Fig. 8.1
State the name of the component shown in Fig. 8.1 .......................................................... [1]
(c) In the space below, write down the truth table for a NAND gate.
[2]

12
(d) Fig. 8.2 shows the connections to two logic gates.
A D
B
E
C
Fig. 8.2
Table 8.1 shows part of the truth table for the arrangement of logic gates in Fig. 8.2.
Complete Table 8.1 for the input values shown.
Table 8.1
intermediate
inputs output
point
A B C D E
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

13
9 (a) Describe how to demagnetise a bar magnet using alternating current (a.c.) in a coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) motor.
d.c. power supply
split-ring
commutator
N S
coil
Fig. 9.1
(i) Explain the purpose of the split-ring commutator.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The voltage of the power supply is increased.
State the effect this has on the motor.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]

14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit containing a filament lamp of resistance 0.30 Ω and two resistors, each of
resistance 0.20 Ω.
0.20 Ω
0.20 Ω
0.30 Ω
Fig. 10.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of the lamp and the two resistors.
resistance = ........................................................ [3]
(b) The potential difference (p.d.) of the supply is increased so that the current in the lamp
increases.
State and explain any change in the resistance of the lamp.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

15
11 (a) A radon-222 nucleus contains 86 protons and 136 neutrons. It decays by emitting an
α-particle and becomes a nucleus of an isotope of polonium. The symbol for radon is Rn and
the symbol for polonium is Po.
Write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[3]
(b) Carbon-14 is radioactive with a half-life of 5700 years. An animal bone is dug up in an
archaeological excavation. The quantity of carbon-14 in the bone is 25% of what it was when
the bone was buried.
Calculate the time that has elapsed since it was buried.
time = .............................................. years [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

* 8 2 4 7 4 4 5 0 5 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (RW/SW) 169311/4
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

3
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a distance‑time graph for a cyclist travelling between points P and V on a straight
road.
800
distance / m
600
V
S T U
400
R
200
Q
P
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the motion between:
Q and R ....................................................................................................................................
R and S .....................................................................................................................................
S and T. .....................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Calculate the speed between U and V.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(c) After point V, the straight road continues down a steep hill. The cyclist travels down the steep
hill. He does not apply the brakes and all resistive forces can be ignored.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a possible motion for the cyclist after V. [1]
[Total: 6]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is the top view of a small ship of mass 1.2 × 106 kg. The ship is moving slowly sideways at
0.040 m / s as it comes in to dock.
large wooden pillars
dock wall
small ship
0.040 m / s
Fig. 2.1
The ship hits the wooden pillars which move towards the dock wall.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the ship before it hits the pillars.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The ship is in contact with the pillars for 0.30 s as it comes to rest.
Calculate the average force exerted on the side of the ship.
force = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

5
(c) Assume that the kinetic energy calculated in (a) is used to do work moving the pillars.
Calculate the distance moved by the pillars.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
(d) Dock walls sometimes have the pillars replaced with rubber car tyres.
Explain how this reduces the possibility of damage when a boat docks.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a small submarine submerged below the surface of the sea.
surface of the sea
sea
3.0 × 103 m water
submarine
Fig. 3.1
(a) The density of sea water is 1030 kg / m3.
Calculate the pressure due to the sea water on the top of the submarine when it is 3.0 × 103 m
below the surface.
pressure = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

7
(b) The submarine emits a pulse of sound to detect other objects in the sea. The speed of sound
in sea water is 1500 m / s. An echo is received with a time delay of 0.50 s after the original
sound is emitted.
(i) Calculate the distance between the submarine and the other object.
distance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Another pulse of sound is emitted through the air when the submarine is on the surface.
An echo is received from a second object that is in the air. This echo is received 0.50 s
after the pulse of sound is emitted.
Compare the distance of the second object from the submarine with the distance
calculated in (b)(i). Tick one box. Give a reason for your answer.
distance is smaller
distance is the same
distance is larger
Reason ........................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]

8
4 (a) Water molecules escape to the atmosphere from water boiling in a pan. Water molecules
evaporate from the surface of a bowl of cool water and also escape to the atmosphere.
State two ways in which boiling is different from evaporation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a heater in a metal block.
thermometer
electric heater
metal block
Fig. 4.1
The power of the heater is 370 W and it is switched on for 4.0 minutes. The metal block has a
specific heat capacity of 420 J / (kg °C) and a mass of 5.0 kg.
Calculate the increase of temperature of the block. Assume all the thermal energy from the
heater is transferred to the block.
temperature increase = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

9
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a cross‑section of the inside of a vacuum flask containing a cold liquid. The walls of
the vacuum flask are made of glass.
stopper
silvered
surfaces
vacuum
glass
Fig. 5.1
(a) The vacuum flask is being used to keep a liquid cool on a hot day.
Explain how the labelled features of the vacuum flask keep the liquid cool by reducing thermal
energy transfer. Include the names of the processes involved.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) Suggest a suitable material for the stopper.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

10
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts of a wave approaching a narrow gap and passing through the gap.
The wavelength is λ.
wavefronts gap barrier
direction of
travel
barrier
Fig. 6.1
(i) State the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes through the gap.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
λ
(ii) A wave with a wavelength approaches the same gap.
2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three wavefronts for this wave as it approaches the gap and three
more wavefronts as the wave continues beyond it. [3]
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

11
(b) Table 6.1 shows 5 different types of electromagnetic wave.
In the blank column in Table 6.1, write the numbers 1 to 5 to show the order of wavelength.
Write 1 for the wave with the shortest wavelength and 5 for the wave with the longest
wavelength. [2]
Table 6.1
type of electromagnetic wave order of wavelength

gamma rays
light
microwaves
ultraviolet
X‑rays
(c) (i) State the speed of radio waves in air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A radio station transmits radio waves with a frequency of 96 MHz.

Calculate the wavelength of these radio waves.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

13
7 Fig. 7.1 shows light approaching a boundary between two materials at speed v. The speed of the
light after crossing the boundary is 1.3v.
light
50°
boundary
Fig. 7.1
(a) Determine the angle of incidence.
angle of incidence = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the angle of refraction.
[Total: 4]

14
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a 240 V mains supply connected to an air‑conditioning unit and a freezer. A fuse X
is placed in the circuit as shown.
240 V
air-conditioning
mains freezer
unit
supply
Fig. 8.1
The freezer has an operating power of 700 W.
(a) Calculate the current in the freezer.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The maximum operating current of the air‑conditioning unit is 7.5 A.
Fuses of current rating 1 A, 3 A, 5 A, 10 A, 13 A and 30 A are available.
Suggest a suitable rating for fuse X. Give two reasons for your answer.
fuse rating .................................................................................................................................
Reason 1 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

15
(c) A fuse is made out of a short length of wire.
Explain why fuses of a higher rating are made of thicker wire.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Electrical energy can be obtained from renewable and non‑renewable sources of energy.
(i) State two renewable sources of energy.
Source 1 ........................................................
Source 2 ........................................................ [2]
(ii) State one social, economic or environmental disadvantage of one of your answers to
(d)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

16
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows an electrical component.
Fig. 9.1
State the name of the component shown in Fig. 9.1. ......................................................... [1]
(b) In the space below, write down the truth table for a NOR gate.
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

17
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows the connections between two logic gates.
A D
B
E
C
Fig. 9.2
Complete the truth table shown in Table 9.1 for this combination of logic gates.
Table 9.1
inputs intermediate output

point
A B C D E
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
(d) Referring to a simple electron model, state what distinguishes electrical conductors from
electrical insulators.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

18
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a simple alternating current generator.
rotation
of coil
coil
N S
P
output
Q
Fig. 10.1
(a) On Fig. 10.2, sketch a graph to show how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced varies with
time for one revolution of the coil. Assume that the coil starts in the horizontal position, as
shown in Fig. 10.1.
Label the points on the time axis where the coil has completed 1/4 revolution and
3/4 revolution. [3]
e.m.f.
0
0 time
Fig. 10.2
(b) Explain why an e.m.f. is induced only when the coil is turning.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

19
(c) State the name of the components labelled P and Q and state their purpose.
Name: .......................................................................................................................................
Purpose: ...................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State two possible changes that cause a larger e.m.f. to be induced.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

20
11 (a) Americium (Am) is a radioactive isotope. A nucleus of americium contains 95 protons and
146 neutrons. It decays by emitting an α‑particle to form a nucleus of an isotope of neptunium
(Np).
Write down the nuclide equation for the decay of americium to neptunium.
[4]
(b) Ionisation smoke detectors contain americium and two small electrodes with a small voltage
between them. The air between the electrodes is ionised by α‑particles so that there is a
small electric current between the electrodes.
(i) Suggest and explain the effect of smoke on the current between the electrodes in the
smoke detector.
Suggestion: .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Explanation: ......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest two reasons for using an α‑particle emitter in a smoke detector.
Reason 1 ...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

* 0 4 3 1 9 9 1 6 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) October/November 2019
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/CGW) 174867/3
2
1 A car accelerates from rest at time t = 0 to its maximum speed.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the first 25 s of its motion.
40
speed
m/s
30
20
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) The mass of the car is 2300 kg.
For the time between t = 0 and t = 5.0 s, determine:
(i) the acceleration of the car
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the car.
resultant force = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

3
(b) Describe the motion of the car between t = 10 s and t = 15 s. Explain how Fig. 1.1 shows this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Between t = 10 s and t = 15 s, the force exerted on the car due to the engine remains constant.
Suggest and explain why the car moves in the way shown by Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19 [Turn over

4
2 (a) State two properties of an object that may be changed by the action of forces.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A chest expander is a piece of equipment used by athletes in a gym. Fig. 2.1 shows a chest
expander that consists of five identical springs connected in parallel between two handles.
springs
Fig. 2.1
Each spring has an unstretched length of 0.63 m.
Two athletes are stretching the chest expander by pulling on the two handles in opposite
directions.
(i) The springs obey Hooke’s law.
Explain what is meant by this statement.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Each athlete pulls the handle towards himself with a force of 1300 N.
1. State the tension in each spring.
tension = ........................................................ [1]
2. The chest expander stretches and each spring is now 0.94 m long.
Calculate the spring constant k of each spring.
k = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

5
(iii) State the energy changes taking place as the two athletes use their muscles to stretch
the chest expander.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a shooting competition, where air rifles fire soft metal pellets at distant targets.
target
air rifle
Fig. 3.1
When an air rifle is fired, it exerts an impulse of 0.019 N s on the pellet.
(a) Define impulse.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The pellet has a mass of 1.1 × 10–4 kg.
Determine:
(i) the speed with which the pellet leaves the rifle
speed = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) the kinetic energy of the pellet as it leaves the rifle.
kinetic energy = ........................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

7
(c) The pellet melts when it strikes the target.
Describe how the molecular structure of the liquid metal differs from that of the solid metal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a loudspeaker that is producing a sound wave in air of frequency 15 000 Hz.
hollow
paper
cone
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how the cone of the loudspeaker produces this sound.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of this sound.
wavelength = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

9
(c) The loudspeaker is placed a considerable distance to the left of a barrier with a gap. The
width of the gap is double the wavelength of the sound. Sound from the loudspeaker reaches
the barrier and passes through the gap.
Fig. 4.2 shows the gap in the barrier.
barrier
barrier
On Fig. 4.2, sketch a diagram that represents the sound wave as a series of wavefronts
• travelling towards the barrier
• in the gap
• and travelling away from the barrier.

[3]
[Total: 8]

10
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a sphere that is negatively charged. The sphere is attached to a plastic stand.
plastic stand
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw arrows to indicate the pattern and direction of the electric field in the region
surrounding the sphere. [2]
(b) A smaller, uncharged metal sphere S is suspended by a plastic thread and brought close to
the negatively charged sphere. Fig. 5.2 shows the two spheres.
plastic thread
Fig. 5.2
(i) By drawing on Fig. 5.2, indicate the distribution of charge on S. [2]
(ii) State what happens to S.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) An earth wire is then touched against S.
Describe what happens in the wire and state how this affects the charge on S.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

11
(c) The metal sphere S is an electrical conductor. The plastic thread is an electrical insulator.
Explain this difference by referring to the structures of the two materials.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a shower that takes in cold water. The water passes through an electric water
heater and emerges from the showerhead at a higher temperature.
showerhead
electric
water heater
Fig. 6.1
The power of the heater is 9000 W.
(a) The shower is powered by a 230 V electricity supply.
(i) Calculate the current in the heater when it is switched on.
current = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) Suggest a suitable rating for the fuse in the heater circuit.
fuse rating = ........................................................ [1]
(b) The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C). The initial temperature of the cold water
is 16 °C.
Determine the maximum mass of water that can be heated to a temperature of 35 °C in 1.0 s.
mass = ........................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

13
(c) A safety control in the shower switches off the shower when the water becomes dangerously
hot. The control uses a thermocouple thermometer to measure the temperature of the heated
water.
(i) Describe the structure of a thermocouple thermometer. Include a diagram in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest one reason why a thermocouple thermometer is suitable for this purpose.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

14
7 The resistance of a 1.0 m length of resistance wire is 7.6 Ω. A length of this wire is taped to a metre
rule. A crocodile clip is connected to one end of the resistance wire exactly at the 0 m mark of the
rule. Fig. 7.1 shows the crocodile clip connected to terminal P.
0 m mark movable contact metre rule

l
1.0 m mark
crocodile clip
resistance wire
connecting wire
terminal P terminal Q
Fig. 7.1
A second terminal Q is connected to a movable contact using a long length of connecting wire.
The movable contact is in contact with the resistance wire at a length l from the 0 m mark on the
rule.
The movable contact is placed at different points on the resistance wire. The resistance R of the
length l of the wire depends on l.
(a) On Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show how R varies with l for values of l between l = 0 and
l = 1.0 m. Mark appropriate values on the axes of the graph.
R/Ω
0
0 l/m
Fig. 7.2
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

15
(b) Fig. 7.3 shows a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V connected across the 1.0 m length
of the resistance wire.
12 V
l
movable contact metre rule
resistance wire
terminal P terminal Q
Fig. 7.3
(i) State what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate:
1. the current in the resistance wire
current = ........................................................ [2]
2. the potential difference (p.d.) between terminal P and terminal Q when l = 0.35 m
p.d. = ........................................................ [1]
3. the charge that passes through the resistance wire in 5.5 minutes.
charge = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 9]

16
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a ray of red light incident on one side of a glass prism in air.
glass prism
red light
Fig. 8.1
For red light, the refractive index of glass is nR.
(a) The angle of incidence is 53° and the angle of refraction in the glass is 30°.
(i) Calculate nR.
nR = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, sketch a line to indicate the path of the red light when it emerges from the
glass prism. Label this path R. [1]
(iii) Explain why the quantity refractive index does not have a unit.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For violet light, the refractive index nV of glass is slightly larger than nR.
(i) A ray of violet light is incident on the prism along the same path as the ray of red light.
On Fig. 8.1, sketch a line to indicate the path of the violet light in the prism and when it
emerges into the air. Label this path V. [1]
(ii) When a ray of white light is incident on the prism, dispersion produces a continuous
spectrum of coloured light.
State how the speed of light in glass depends on its frequency. Explain how this is shown
by the dispersion of white light in the prism.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19
17
BLANK PAGE

18
9 (a) The chemical symbol of the element lithium is Li. The proton number of lithium is 3.
Fig. 9.1 is a representation of a nucleus of a radioactive isotope of lithium that is about to

decay.
Fig. 9.1
(i) Write down, using nuclide notation, the symbol that represents this isotope of lithium.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) This isotope of lithium decays by β-particle emission to form another nucleus.
Complete Fig. 9.2 to represent this decay by:
• using the same representation as in Fig. 9.1 and in the space after the arrow, draw
a diagram of the nucleus formed by the decay
• writing the name of the particle that is identical to a β-particle on the answer line
provided.
+
.............................................
Fig. 9.2
[3]
(b) A radiation detector is set up in a laboratory where there are no radioactive samples.
On six separate occasions, the detector is switched on for 1.0 minute and the background
count is recorded. The counts are:
23 27 25 24 20 25
(i) State why the readings are not all identical.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest a possible source for this background radiation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

19
(iii) A sample containing only one radioactive isotope is brought into the laboratory. The
half-life of the isotope is 15 hours.
The sample is placed near to the radiation detector in this laboratory. The detector is
switched on and, after 1.0 minute, a count of 440 is recorded.
The sample is left next to the detector and the experiment is repeated 45 hours later.
The detector is switched on for 1.0 minute.
Predict the reading for the count obtained on this occasion.
reading ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

* 6 5 2 4 3 9 4 7 5 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/CB) 174868/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the top view of a rectangular paddling pool of constant depth. The pool is filled with
sea water.
44.0 m
20.0 m
(a) The volume of the sea water in the pool is 264 m3.
Calculate the depth of the pool.
depth = ........................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

3
(b) The mass of the sea water in the pool is 2.70 × 105 kg.
Calculate the density of the sea water. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
density = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Calculate the pressure due to the sea water at the bottom of the pool.
pressure = ........................................................ [2]
(d) State a suitable instrument for measuring the dimensions given in Fig. 1.1.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) State the two conditions which must be true for an object to be in equilibrium.
condition 1 ................................................................................................................................
condition 2 ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform metre rule PQ in equilibrium.
10 cm 40 cm
P Q
pivot
0.50 N
Fig. 2.1
The distance PQ is 100 cm. The mass of the metre rule is 0.12 kg and its weight is W.
(i) On Fig 2.1, draw and label:
1. an arrow to show the force W acting on PQ at the centre of mass
2. an arrow to show the force R acting on PQ at the pivot.

[2]
(ii) By taking moments about the pivot, calculate F.
F = ........................................................ [4]
(iii) Calculate R.
R = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a gas contained in a cylinder enclosed by a piston.
pressure gauge
piston
cylinder
gas
Fig. 3.1
(a) Describe, in terms of momentum of the molecules, how a pressure is exerted on the walls of
the cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The piston is pushed into the cylinder. The volume decreases from 820 cm3 to 330 cm3 . The
pressure gauge measures the pressure after compression as 20 000 Pa. The temperature
remains constant.
Calculate the value of the pressure before the gas was compressed.
pressure = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 6]

6
4 (a) A student carries out an experiment to determine the thermal capacity of a metal block. The
block is heated by an electric heater for 23 minutes. The current in the heater is 3.0 A at a
potential difference (p.d.) of 12 V.
The temperature of the block rises from 20 °C to 70 °C.
Calculate the thermal capacity of the block.
thermal capacity = ........................................................ [4]
(b) 1. Two metal spheres of different diameters are heated to 900 °C in a hot oven. The two
spheres are removed from the oven.
State and explain any difference in the initial rates of emission of radiation of thermal energy
between the two spheres.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. One hot sphere is now heated in a hotter oven.
State and explain any effect on the rate of emission of radiation of thermal energy from that
sphere when it is removed from the hotter oven.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

7
5 (a) One difference between a longitudinal wave and a transverse wave is that a longitudinal
wave consists of compressions and rarefactions.
(i) Explain the terms compression and rarefaction using ideas about particles.
compression ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
rarefaction .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe one other way in which longitudinal wave motion differs from transverse wave
motion.
Longitudinal wave motion ..................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Transverse wave motion ...................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) A sound wave of frequency 0.120 kHz travels through a rock at a speed of 3500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the wave.
wavelength = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) The wave travels from the rock into the air.
State and explain whether the wave will be audible to a healthy human ear.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows an empty container and an observer’s eye. There is a small coin at position O.
The observer is unable to see the coin.
eye
Fig. 6.1
The observer and the coin stay in the same position and the container is filled with water. The
observer can now see the coin.
(i) Explain why the coin can be seen by the observer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name of the wave process which occurs as the light passes from the water into
the air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the image of the coin is a virtual image.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the speed of light in air.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The refractive index of water is 1.3.
Calculate the speed of light in water.
speed of light in water = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a coil of wire wound on a thin plastic cylinder. The plastic has no effect on any
magnetic field. The galvanometer is extremely sensitive.
magnet
coil of wire
S N B
A
small trolley
plastic cylinder
Fig. 7.1
A magnet is fixed to a small trolley that runs without friction on a track through the cylinder
and coil.
(i) The trolley is released from point A so it runs through the coil from right to left.
State and explain what is observed on the galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The trolley is now released from point B so it runs through the coil from right to left again.
State what is observed on the galvanometer and explain why it is different to your answer
in (a)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows an extension lead used to supply power to a 3 kW electric heater on a cool
evening.
damp grass
3 kW electric
heater
cut in outer
insulation
plug and socket

lying on grass
paved area
extension lead designed
for use with a 25 W lamp
Fig. 7.2
State and explain three dangers with this arrangement.
danger 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
danger 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
danger 3 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

11
8 (a) A wire of length 2.0 m and cross-sectional area 0.40 mm2 has a resistance of 0.14 Ω.
Calculate the resistance of another wire of the same material of length 3.0 m and
cross-sectional area 0.90 mm2.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [4]
(b) A student is designing a digital electronic circuit. Fig. 8.1 shows her partly completed design.
A C
B D
Fig. 8.1
(i) Table 8.1 is a truth table.

Complete the columns in this truth table to show the values for input B in the circuit.
Table 8.1
Input A Input B Point C Point D Output O

1 0 0 1
0 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
[2]
(ii) The column O in the truth table shows the desired output values for the circuit.
On Fig. 8.1, complete the circuit to achieve these output values. Label any gate used. [2]
[Total: 8]

12
9 (a) Describe what is meant by the term electric field.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows two parallel conducting plates connected to a battery.
conducting plate
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, draw five lines to show the electric field pattern between the two plates. [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

13
(c) When fully charged, a 1.2 V rechargeable battery can deliver a current of 210 mA for 10 hours.
(i) Calculate the charge that can be delivered by the fully charged battery.
charge = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) Calculate the energy stored in the battery when fully charged.
energy stored = ........................................................ [2]
(iii) State the type of energy stored when the battery is charged.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) The nucleus of a hydrogen atom is a proton. The mass of a proton is m and the size of the
charge on a proton is e.
Complete Table 10.1. Express your answers in terms of m and e. Three spaces have already
been completed.
Table 10.1
particle or emission mass charge

proton m e
neutron m
γ-ray
nucleus of helium-4
( 42He)
[4]
(b) Many schools and colleges use radioactive isotopes for teaching and research. Describe how
these radioactive isotopes are handled, used and stored in a safe way.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

* 0 3 3 3 4 7 9 9 2 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (PQ/SG) 174869/4
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the top view of a tank in an aquarium. The tank is filled with salt water.
1.6 m
1.1 m
1.0 m
3.2 m
The depth of the water in the tank is 2.0 m.
(a) Calculate the volume of the water in the tank.
volume = ........................................................ [3]
(b) The density of the water in the tank is 1.1 × 103 kg / m3.
Calculate the mass of the water in the tank.
mass = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

3
(c) Calculate the pressure due to the water at a level of 0.80 m above the base of the tank.
pressure = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) (i) State, in words, the equation that defines the moment of a force.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what is meant by the moment of a force.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Force is a vector quantity.
Explain what is meant by the term vector.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a tower crane used to lift a load on a construction site.
counterweight
load
Fig. 2.1
Explain how the counterweight prevents the crane from toppling over.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

5
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows a waterfall.
Fig. 3.1
(i) Describe the main energy transfer which is taking place as the water falls.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The speed of the water as it hits the bottom is 21 m / s.
Calculate the height h of the waterfall.
height = ........................................................ [3]
(iii) State and explain any assumption you made in (ii).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The Sun is the source of energy for most energy resources used to produce electricity.
State two energy resources that have another source for their energy.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 Solids have a fixed shape. Liquids adapt to the shape of their container. Gases fill their container.
Explain in terms of forces between molecules and arrangement of molecules, why solids, liquids
and gases have these properties.
Solids ...............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Liquids ..............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Gases ...............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
[6]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

7
5 An electric kettle contains water at a temperature of 19 °C. The kettle has a power rating of 3.0 kW
and is switched on for 3.5 minutes.
(a) Calculate the energy supplied to the kettle by the electricity supply.
electrical energy = ........................................................ [3]
(b) At 3.5 minutes, the temperature of the water reaches 100 °C. The volume of the water in
the kettle is 1700 cm3 and its density is 1.0 g / cm3. The specific heat capacity of water is
4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the thermal energy gained by the water.
thermal energy = ........................................................ [5]
(c) Calculate the efficiency of the kettle.
efficiency = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]

8
6 Fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of a sound wave travelling in air from left to right.
Fig. 6.1
(a) State the name given to the:
(i) region around A in the diagram ............................................................... [1]
(ii) region around B in the diagram. ............................................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw a double-headed arrow to show one wavelength. [1]
(c) The loudness of the sound increases at the same pitch.
State and explain any change there would be in the pattern of wavefronts shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) The wave passes into water.
State and explain any change in the pattern of wavefronts shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows the position of a converging lens, its principal axis and an object O.
principal
axis
F O F
lens
Fig. 7.1
Each principal focus of the lens is labelled F.
On Fig. 7.1, draw a ray diagram to locate the position of the image formed by the lens.
Label the image I. [3]
(b) Describe the nature of the image I.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Images formed by lenses sometimes have coloured edges.
Suggest a reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

10
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a negatively charged conducting sphere.
− −
− −
− −
− −
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, draw the electric field pattern around the sphere. [2]
(b) The current in an electrical device is 0.21 A.
Calculate the charge that flows during a 75 s period of time.
charge = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

11
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit containing an LED and two resistors in parallel, each of resistance R.
R R
3.7 V
Fig. 9.1
The normal operating voltage of the LED is 2.1 V and the normal current is 0.19 A.
(a) (i) The potential difference (p.d.) across the LED is measured with a voltmeter.
On Fig. 9.1, draw the symbol for this voltmeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(ii) The current in the LED is measured with an ammeter.
On Fig. 9.1, draw the symbol for this ammeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(b) Calculate the value of R when the LED is operating normally.
R = ........................................................ [5]
[Total: 7]

12
10 (a) A magnet and a coil are attached separately to a door and a door frame as shown in
Fig. 10.1.
The purpose of the arrangement is to activate a circuit connected to an LED indicator when
the door is opening or closing. This will provide a visual indication that the door is being used.
indicator
coil
magnet
S
door frame
door
Fig. 10.1
Initially, the door is closed and then it is opened.
(i) Explain why the indicator comes on and then goes off when the door is opened.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The door shuts. The indicator comes on more brightly but for a shorter time than it
did in (i). Suggest and explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

13
(b) A circuit breaker is recommended for use with an electric lawnmower.
State two reasons for this recommendation.
reason 1 .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
reason 2 .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

14
11 (a) The circles shown in Fig. 11.1 represent three gold nuclei. Three α-particles are approaching
the gold nuclei.
α-particle
α-particle
α-particle
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, complete the path of each α-particle. [3]
(b) A detector of radioactivity in a laboratory indicates an average of 16 counts / min when no

radioactive samples are present. A radioactive sample of half-life 1.5 days is placed close to
the detector, which indicates a count rate of 208 counts / min.
Calculate the count rate that is indicated 6 days later.
count rate = ...................................... counts / min [4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

15
(c) The waste from nuclear power stations includes the isotopes technetium-99, tin-126 and
selenium-79. These isotopes are radioactive with half-lives of many thousands of years.
State three economic and environmental consequences of producing this waste.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

Cambridge International Examinations
* 9 4 3 9 9 8 5 6 4 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.

This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.
DC (SC/SW) 149762/5
2
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time axes for the graph of the motion of a car.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) The car starts from rest.
From time = 0 to time = 15 s, the car has a constant acceleration to a speed of 28 m / s.
From time = 15 s to time = 32 s, the car has a constant speed of 28 m / s.
From time = 32 s, the car has a constant deceleration of 2.0 m / s2 until it comes to rest.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph, using the space below for any calculations.
[5]
(ii) From time = 15 s to time = 32 s, the path of the car is part of a circle.
For this motion, state
1. the direction of the resultant force on the car,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. what happens to the velocity of the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

3
2 (a) A force is used to move an object from the Earth’s surface to a greater height.
Explain why the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the object increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a train moving up towards the top of a mountain.
Fig. 2.1
The train transports 80 passengers, each of average mass 65 kg, through a vertical height of
1600 m.
Calculate the increase in the total gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the passengers.
increase in g.p.e. = ......................................................... [2]
(c) The engine of the train has a power of 1500 kW. The time taken to reach the top of the
mountain is 30 minutes.
Calculate the efficiency of the engine in raising the 80 passengers 1600 m to the top of the
mountain.
efficiency = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]

4
3 (a) Complete the statement by writing in the blank spaces.
The moment of a force about a pivot is equal to ......................................................................
multiplied by .......................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a horizontal rod of length 2.4 m and weight 160 N. The weight of the rod acts
at its centre. The rod is suspended by two vertical ropes X and Y. The tension in each rope is
80 N.
80 N 80 N
2.4 m
rope X rope Y
rod
160 N
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the name given to the point at which the weight of the rod acts.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the mass of the rod.
mass = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) The rod is in equilibrium.
Using data from Fig. 3.1, explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a cold plastic spoon that has just been placed in hot liquid in a cup.
plastic spoon
hot liquid
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe, in terms of molecules, why the temperature of the whole of the spoon increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The plastic spoon is replaced by a metal spoon.
Describe an additional process by which the temperature of the whole of this spoon increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The cup contains 150 g of liquid of specific heat capacity 4.2 J / (g °C). When the cold spoon is
placed into the hot liquid, the temperature of the liquid decreases from 80 °C to 56 °C.
Calculate the loss of thermal energy from the liquid.
energy loss = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

6
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus used to observe the motion of smoke particles that are in the air
in a box.
eye
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Fig. 5.1
Light from a lamp enters the box through a window in one side of the box. The smoke particles
are observed using a microscope fixed above a window in the top of the box.
(i) The motion of a single smoke particle is observed through the microscope.
In the circle shown, sketch the path of this smoke particle.
[1]
(ii) Explain why the smoke particle follows the path that is observed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

7
(b) A tennis player is practising by hitting a ball many times against a wall.
The ball hits the wall 20 times in 60 s. The average change in momentum for each collision
with the wall is 4.2 kg m / s.
Calculate the average force that the ball exerts on the wall.
average force = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 represents the electromagnetic spectrum.
visible light
radio waves microwaves A B C D
Fig. 6.1
State the radiation in each of the regions represented by A, B, C and D in Fig. 6.1.
A ................................................................
B ...............................................................
C ...............................................................
D ...............................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

9
(b) A source emits visible light.
Fig. 6.2 shows a ray of red light from the source incident on the face XY of a glass prism at
point S.
normal
i S
ray of
red light
Y Z
Fig. 6.2
The angle of incidence i of the ray is 35 °. The refractive index of the glass for red light is 1.5.
(i) Calculate the angle of refraction in the glass at S.
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw the refracted ray at face XY and the ray emerging from face XZ of the
prism. Label this ray R. [2]
(iii) A ray of blue light follows the same path as the ray of red light incident on the face XY.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of this ray in the prism and emerging from the prism.
Label this ray B. [2]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) The speed of a light wave in air is 3.00 × 108 m / s. The refractive index of water is 1.33.
Calculate the speed of the light wave in water.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows parallel wavefronts of a light wave in air incident on a boundary with a
transparent plastic.
direction
of light wave
air
transparent
plastic
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1,
(i) draw the positions of the four refracted wavefronts in the plastic, [3]
(ii) draw an arrow to show the direction of travel of the refracted wave, [1]
(iii) label the angle of refraction r of the light wave. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

11
8 (a) The lamp of a car headlight is rated at 12 V, 50 W.
Calculate the current in the lamp when operating normally.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) A car is driven at night.
In a journey, the total charge that passes through the 12 V battery is 270 kC.
(i) Calculate the electrical energy transferred.
energy = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) The fuel used by the car provides 3.6 × 104 J / cm3.
Calculate the volume of fuel used to provide the energy calculated in (b)(i).
volume = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows current-potential difference graphs for a resistor and for a lamp.
6.0
current / A
4.0 lamp
2.0
resistor
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
potential difference / V
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) The potential difference (p.d.) applied to the resistor is increased. Tick the box that
indicates the effect on the resistance of the resistor.
resistance increases
resistance is constant
resistance decreases
[1]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) applied to the lamp is increased. Tick the box that indicates
the effect on the resistance of the lamp.
resistance increases
resistance is constant
resistance decreases
[1]
(b) The p.d. across the lamp is 6.0 V. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

13
(c) The lamp and the resistor are connected in parallel to a 6.0 V supply.
Calculate the current from the supply.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The lamp and the resistor are connected in series to another power supply. The current in
the circuit is 4.0 A.
Calculate the total p.d. across the lamp and the resistor.
p.d. = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a straight wire AB placed in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet.
The ends of AB are connected to a galvanometer.
N S
Fig. 10.1
When AB is moved vertically, the needle of the galvanometer shows a deflection.
State three factors that affect the size of the deflection.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
3 ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a transformer.
240 V P S 12 V
Fig. 10.2
(i) The primary coil P has 8000 turns and an input of 240 V. The secondary coil S has an
output of 12 V.
Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.
number = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18
15
(ii) A circuit containing a resistor is connected to the terminals A and B.

A direct current (d.c.) is required in this resistor.
On Fig. 10.2, draw this circuit. [1]
[Total: 6]

16
11 (a) To ensure the safety of workers in laboratories where radioactive sources are used, describe
how radioactive materials
(i) should be stored,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) should be handled.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Complete the table below for three types of emission from radioactive sources.
type of emission nature range in air absorbed by
electromagnetic radiation several km
helium nucleus 0.2 mm paper
electron
[3]
(c) State the type of radiation emitted when
an americium nucleus ( Am) decays into a neptunium nucleus ( Np),

241 237
(i) 95 93
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
a phosphorus nucleus ( 15 P) decays into a silicon nucleus ( 16 Si).

32 32
(ii)
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

* 5 4 9 8 1 5 2 3 9 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/SW) 150767/5
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a vehicle accelerating from rest.
30
speed 25
m/s
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the vehicle at time = 30 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Without further calculation, state how the acceleration at time = 100 s compares to the
acceleration at time = 10 s. Suggest, in terms of force, a reason why any change has taken
place.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Determine the distance travelled by the vehicle between time = 120 s and time = 160 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a fork-lift truck lifting a box.
box
Fig. 2.1
The electric motor that drives the lifting mechanism is powered by batteries.
(a) State the form of the energy stored in the batteries.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The lifting mechanism raises a box of mass 32 kg through a vertical distance of 2.5 m in 5.4 s.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the box.
gravitational potential energy = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The efficiency of the lifting mechanism is 0.65 (65%).
Calculate the input power to the lifting mechanism.
input power = ...........................................................[3]
(c) The batteries are recharged from a mains voltage supply that is generated in an oil-fired
power station.
By comparison with a wind farm, state one advantage and one disadvantage of running a
power station using oil.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

4
3 A rectangular container has a base of dimensions 0.12 m × 0.16 m. The container is filled with a
liquid. The mass of the liquid in the container is 4.8 kg.
(a) Calculate
(i) the weight of liquid in the container,
weight = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the pressure due to the liquid on the base of the container.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Explain why the total pressure on the base of the container is greater than the value calculated
in (a)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The depth of liquid in the container is 0.32 m.
Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

5
4 (a) Describe the movement of the molecules in
(i) a solid,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) a gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A closed box contains gas molecules.
Explain, in terms of momentum, how the molecules exert a pressure on the walls of the box.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

6
5 (a) A ray of light in air is incident on a glass block. The light changes direction.
State
(i) the name of this effect,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the cause of this effect.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1, drawn to full scale, shows a thin converging lens of focal length 3.5 cm.
1.0 cm lens
1.0 cm
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, mark each of the two principal focuses and label each with the letter F. [1]
(ii) An object O of height 4.4 cm is placed a distance of 7.5 cm from the lens.
On Fig. 5.1, draw rays from the tip of the object O to locate the image. Draw and label
the image. [3]
(iii) Determine the height of the image.
height of the image = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) State and explain whether the image is real or virtual.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18
7
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts approaching a gap in a barrier.
wavefront
barrier
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw three wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]
(ii) Fig. 6.2 shows the gap in the barrier increased to five times the gap in Fig. 6.1.
wavefront
barrier
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]

8
(b) Describe, with a labelled diagram, an experiment using water waves that shows the reflection
of wavefronts that occur at a straight barrier.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

9
BLANK PAGE

10
7 (a) State, in terms of their structure, why metals are good conductors of electricity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A cylindrical metal wire W1, of length l and cross-sectional area A, has a resistance of 16 Ω.
l
A second cylindrical wire W2 having length 2 and cross-sectional area 2 A, is made from the
same metal.
Determine
(i) the resistance of W2,
resistance of W2 = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the effective resistance of W1 and W2 when connected in parallel.
resistance of parallel pair = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The parallel pair of resistors in (b)(ii) is connected to a battery that is made from three cells in
series, each of electromotive force (e.m.f.) E. There is a current in each resistor.
(i) State the e.m.f. of the battery.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The current in the battery is IB, the current in W1 is I1 and the current in W2 is I2.
Place a tick (3) in one box to indicate how these three currents are related.
I1 > I2 > IB
I1 > IB > I2
I2 > I1 > IB
I2 > IB > I1
IB > I1 > I2
IB > I2 > I1
I1 = I2 = IB
[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

11
8 In a laboratory at normal room temperature, 200 g of water is poured into a beaker. A thermometer
placed in the water has a reading of 22 °C.
Small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added to the water one by one. The mixture is stirred after each
addition until the ice has melted. This process is continued until the temperature recorded by the
thermometer is 0 °C.
The total mass of ice added to the water is found to be 60 g.
(a) The specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 J/(g °C).
Calculate the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker.
thermal energy = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Assume that all the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker is transferred to
the ice.
Calculate the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
specific latent heat of fusion of ice = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest a reason for any inaccuracy in the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice
calculated in (b). Assume the temperature readings and the values for the mass of the water
and the mass of the ice are accurate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]

12
9 (a) A student wants to demagnetise a permanent bar magnet. She suggests these steps:
1. Place the magnet in a long coil.

2. Switch on a large alternating current in the coil.
3. Switch off the current.
4. Remove the bar from the coil.
State and explain whether the steps will always be able to demagnetise the magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i) Fig. 9.1 shows a coil supplied with current using a split-ring commutator.
coil
magnet
S
N split-ring
carbon brush
battery
Fig. 9.1
State and explain any motion of the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

13
(ii) The coil in Fig. 9.1 consists of three turns of wire. The magnetic field strength of the
magnet is M. With a current of 2.0 A in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect T.
The first row of Table 9.1 shows this data.
Table 9.1
magnetic field
number of turns current in the coil / A turning effect
strength
3 2.0 M T
3 8.0 M
6 2.0 M
M
3 2.0 2
Complete Table 9.1 to give the turning effect for the changes made to the arrangement
shown in Fig. 9.1. Choose your answers from the box.
T T T
8 4 2 T 2T 4T 8T
[3]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) Explain why the voltage of the supply to the primary coil of a transformer must be alternating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
A
240 V 8000
mains turns
Fig. 10.1
There are 8000 turns in the primary coil of the transformer. The primary coil is connected to a
240 V mains supply. A 6.0 V lamp connected to the secondary coil operates at full brightness.
(i) Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil,
number of turns = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The current in the lamp is 2.0 A. The transformer operates with 100% efficiency.
Calculate the current in the primary circuit.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) The primary circuit contains a 2 A fuse.
Calculate the maximum number of lamps, identical to the lamp in (ii), that can be
connected in parallel in the secondary circuit without blowing the fuse.
number of lamps = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18
15
222
11 Radon-222 is radioactive. It can be represented as 86
Rn.
(a) For a neutral atom of radon-222, state
1. the number of protons, ...........................
2. the number of neutrons, ...........................
3. the number of electrons. ...........................

[2]
(b) A radon-222 nucleus decays by α-particle emission to a polonium (Po) nucleus.
Complete the equation for the decay of radon-222.
222
86
Rn [2]
(c) Radon-222 has a half-life of 3.8 days.
At a certain time, a sample contains 6.4 × 106 radon nuclei.
Calculate the number of α-particles emitted by the radon nuclei in the following 7.6 days.
number = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

* 0 9 3 9 7 7 2 1 6 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/SW) 150768/5
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows the axes of a distance-time graph for an object moving in a straight line.
80
distance / m
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) 1. On Fig. 1.1, draw between time = 0 and time = 10 s, the graph for an object moving
with a constant speed of 5.0 m / s. Start your graph at distance = 0 m.
2. State the property of the graph that represents speed.
....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Between time = 10 s and time = 20 s the object accelerates. The speed at time = 20 s is
9.0 m / s.
Calculate the average acceleration between time = 10 s and time = 20 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

3
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the axes of a speed-time graph for a different object.
50
speed
m/s
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(i) The object has an initial speed of 50 m / s and decelerates uniformly at 0.35 m / s2 for
100 s.
On Fig. 1.2, draw the graph to represent the motion of the object. [2]
(ii) Calculate the distance travelled by the object from time = 0 to time = 100 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a hollow metal cylinder containing air, floating in the sea.
surface
of sea air
1.8 m
1.2 m
seawater
bottom
Fig. 2.1
(a) The density of the metal used to make the cylinder is greater than the density of seawater.
Explain why the cylinder floats.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The cylinder has a length of 1.8 m. It floats with 1.2 m submerged in the sea. The bottom of
the cylinder has an area of cross-section of 0.80 m2.
The density of seawater is 1020 kg / m3. Calculate the force exerted on the bottom of the
cylinder due to the depth of the seawater.
force = ...........................................................[4]
(c) Deduce the weight of the cylinder. Explain your answer.
weight = ...............................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18
5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an aircraft on the deck of an aircraft carrier.
Fig. 3.1
The aircraft accelerates from rest along the deck. At take-off, the aircraft has a speed of 75 m / s.
The mass of the aircraft is 9500 kg.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the aircraft at take-off.
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(b) On an aircraft carrier, a catapult provides an accelerating force on the aircraft. The catapult
provides a constant force for a distance of 150 m along the deck.
Calculate the resultant force on the aircraft as it accelerates. Assume that all of the kinetic
energy at take-off is from the work done on the aircraft by the catapult.
force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 represents an atom.
Fig. 4.1
Representing atoms by circles approximately the same size as in Fig. 4.1, sketch
(i) on Fig. 4.2, the arrangement of atoms in a crystalline solid, [1]
(ii) on Fig. 4.3, the arrangement of atoms in a gas. [1]
solid gas
Fig. 4.2 Fig. 4.3
(b) (i) Describe the motion of the atoms in a solid.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A sculptor makes a statue from a block of crystalline rock using a cutting tool. Explain
why he must apply a large force to the tool to remove a small piece of rock.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A helium-filled balloon in the room of a house suddenly bursts.
State and explain, in terms of atoms, what happens to the helium from the balloon after the
balloon has burst.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

7
5 A student wants to investigate good and bad absorbers of thermal radiation. She has the apparatus
shown in Fig. 5.1, a supply of cold water and a metre rule.
small polished small 2 thermometers electric heater

can black-painted
can
Fig. 5.1
Explain how the student could use the apparatus she has available to carry out her investigation.
Describe the results she would expect to obtain. Draw a diagram of the set-up.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 4]

8
6 (a) Circle two of the following that apply to an ultrasound wave travelling in air.
frequency 3.5 Hz frequency 350 Hz frequency 35 000 Hz longitudinal
transverse speed 1.5 m / s speed 1.5 × 103 m / s speed 1.5 × 106 m / s
[2]
(b) Calculate the wavelength in a vacuum of X-rays of frequency 1.3 × 1017 Hz.
wavelength = ...........................................................[3]
(c) A dentist takes an X-ray photograph of a patient’s teeth. Explain why it is safe for the patient
to be close to the source of X-rays, but the dentist must stand away from the source.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) State, with a reason, why microwave ovens are designed only to work with the door closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

9
BLANK PAGE

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light in water that is incident on a submerged, transparent plastic
block.
water
plastic
Fig. 7.1
State what happens to the speed of light as it enters the plastic block. Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the two principal focuses F1 and F2 of a thin converging lens.
F1 F2
O
lens
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 7.2
Fig. 7.2 also shows an object O of height 1.2 cm placed close to the lens. Two rays from the
tip of the object O are incident on the lens.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

11
(i) On Fig. 7.2, continue the paths of these two rays for a further distance of at least 5 cm.
[2]
(ii) Using your answer to (b)(i), find and mark on Fig. 7.2 the image I of object O and label
this image. [2]
(iii) Determine the height of image I.
height = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) State and explain whether I is a real image or a virtual image.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit that contains a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 6.0 V, an ammeter, a
20 Ω resistor and component X.
6.0 V
A X
20 Ω
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) State the name of component X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) across the 20 Ω resistor is measured with a voltmeter.
On Fig. 8.1, draw the symbol for this voltmeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(b) The p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor is varied from zero to 6.0 V. For each value of p.d. a
corresponding current is measured.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

13
On Fig. 8.2, draw a line to indicate how the current measured by the ammeter depends on
the p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor.
0.40
current / A
0.30
0.20
0.10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
p.d. / V
Fig. 8.2 [3]
(c) A second resistor is connected into the circuit in parallel with the 20 Ω resistor.
(i) State how the combined resistance of the two resistors in parallel compares with the
resistance of each of the resistors on its own.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The p.d. across the two parallel resistors is changed and the current in the battery for
each value of the p.d. is measured. A second line could be drawn on Fig. 8.2 to indicate
how the current measured by the ammeter depends on the p.d. across the two resistors
in parallel.
State how the second line differs from the original line. You are not expected to draw this
second line.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

14
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a coil ABCD with two turns. The coil is in a magnetic field.
B C
N S
A D
Fig. 9.1
When there is a current in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect.
(i) Explain why there is a turning effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The value of the current is 3 A. Place one tick in each column of the table to indicate how
the turning effect changes with the change described.
turning effect number of turns on coil current strength of magnetic

increased to six increased to 9 A field decreased by a
factor of 2
decreased by factor of 4
no change
increased by factor of 2
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

15
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a magnet held just below a vertical coil connected to a galvanometer.
Fig. 9.2
The magnet is released.
(i) State any effect on the galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State any effect on the magnetic field produced by the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

16
10 (a) An uncharged conducting metal plate rests on insulating supports. Fig. 10.1 shows the plate
and a positively charged insulating plastic sheet placed on top of the metal plate.
plastic sheet
metal plate
insulating support insulating support
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe any flow of charge that takes place when the plastic sheet is placed onto the
metal plate.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, draw how charges are now arranged within the metal plate. [1]
(iii) State and explain if this arrangement of charge helps to keep the plastic sheet in place.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

17
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows two uncharged conducting spheres suspended on insulating threads.
Fig. 10.2
1. The spheres are now both given positive charges. On Fig. 10.2, draw a possible position
of each sphere and thread.
2. Explain the positions you have drawn.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

18
11 (a) A radioactive nucleus of uranium-235 decays to a nucleus of thorium and emits an α-particle.
Complete the equation.
235 ....... 4
92 U .......
Th + 2α
[2]
(b) A nucleus of uranium-235 undergoes nuclear fission in a reactor.
(i) State what is meant by nuclear fission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why a nuclear reactor is surrounded by thick concrete walls.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State one environmental advantage and one environmental disadvantage of using a
fission reactor to generate electrical energy in a power station.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The thorium produced by the decay in (a) is also radioactive and has a half-life of 26 hours.
At a certain time, a pure sample of this isotope initially contains 4.8 × 109 atoms.
Calculate the number of atoms of this sample that decay in the following 52 hours.
number = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

* 5 7 1 8 2 9 1 8 0 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/SG) 152968/4
2
1 There is no atmosphere on the Moon.
A space probe is launched from the surface of the Moon. Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of
the space probe.
5000
speed
m/s
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 100 200 300
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Determine the acceleration of the space probe at time = 0.
acceleration = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Between time = 0 and time = 150 s, the acceleration of the space probe changes.
(i) Without calculation, state how the graph shows this.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

3
(ii) During this time, the thrust exerted on the space probe by the motor remains constant.
State one possible reason why the acceleration changes in the way shown by Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the distance travelled by the space probe from time = 200 s to time = 300 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 A rifle fires a bullet of mass 0.020 kg vertically upwards through the air. As it leaves the rifle, the
speed of the bullet is 350 m / s.
(a) Calculate
(i) the kinetic energy of the bullet as it leaves the rifle,
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the maximum possible height that the bullet can reach.
maximum height = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The actual height reached by the bullet is less than the value calculated in (a)(ii).
(i) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the bullet, why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the bullet rises through the air, its kinetic energy decreases.
State what happens to this energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

5
3 On a particular day, the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. A bubble of gas forms at a point
5.0 m below the surface of a lake. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(a) Determine
(i) the total pressure at a depth of 5.0 m in the water,
pressure = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the pressure of the gas in the bubble.
pressure = ...........................................................[1]
(b) As the bubble rises to the surface, the mass of gas in the bubble stays constant. The
temperature of the water in the lake is the same throughout.
Explain why the bubble rises to the surface and why its volume increases as it rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

6
4 A beaker contains some water at room temperature. A student places a mercury-in-glass

thermometer in the water with the bulb of the thermometer just beneath the surface of the water.
Fig. 4.1 shows the arrangement.
thermometer
water
Fig. 4.1
The student uses an electric fan to blow air across the open top of the beaker. She notices that the
reading on the thermometer begins to decrease.
(a) Explain, in terms of water molecules, why the temperature of the water at the surface begins
to decrease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The student places the thermometer near the bottom of the beaker. The electric fan continues
to blow air across the top of the beaker. After some time, the student observes that the
temperature of the water at the bottom of the beaker is decreasing.
State the name of the thermal transfer method causing this and explain what is happening in
the water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

7
(c) The thermometer used in this experiment has a small range and a large sensitivity.
(i) State what is meant by
1. range,
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. sensitivity.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain the effect on the range of the thermometer of using a smaller bulb that
contains less mercury.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

8
5 (a) A microscope that produces a very high magnification is used to observe the Brownian motion
of smoke particles in air.
Fig. 5.1(a) shows the apparatus used with the microscope. Fig. 5.1(b) represents the view
through the microscope and shows one of the smoke particles being observed.
smoke
particle
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Fig. 5.1(a) Fig. 5.1(b)
(i) On Fig. 5.1(b), draw a possible path for the smoke particle. [2]
(ii) Describe how air molecules cause the smoke particle to follow the observed path.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a volume of gas in a cylinder.
piston
gas air at
atmospheric
pressure
Fig. 5.2
The piston in the cylinder is free to move. The piston moves to the left when the temperature
of the gas is decreased.
Explain, in terms of the molecules of the gas, why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
9
6 Sound is a longitudinal wave.
(a) Sketch a representation of a longitudinal wave. On your sketch
• indicate and label a distance to show the wavelength,

• mark and label the centre of one compression,
• mark and label the centre of one rarefaction.
[3]
(b) A longitudinal wave passes from one medium into another medium. The speed of the wave is
slower in the second medium.
State what happens to
(i) the frequency of the wave,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the wavelength of the wave.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State a typical value for the speed of sound in air.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]

10
7 (a) A ray of light travelling in air strikes a glass block at an angle of 30° to the normal. The light
slows down as it enters the glass block.
State and explain, in terms of wavefronts, what happens to the light.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The speed of light in this block of glass is 1.9 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

11
8 (a) A thin converging lens is used to produce an image I of object O.
Fig. 8.1 shows O, I and the screen on which the image is produced.
screen
principal axis
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, draw a straight line to represent a ray from the tip of the arrowhead of O to
the tip of the arrowhead of I. Draw a vertical dotted line to indicate the position of the
lens. This dotted line must extend above and below the principal axis. [2]
(ii) Draw a second ray from the tip of the object O to the tip of image I. This ray should pass
through a principle focus. Label the principle focus, F. [1]
(iii) Determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) Image I is further from the lens than object O is from the lens. Image I is described as
enlarged and inverted.
State and explain one other characteristic of I.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

12
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a spherical fishbowl, full of water, by a window. A black curtain hangs behind
the fishbowl.
window black curtain
fishbowl
bright
sunlight
water
Fig. 8.2
When full of water, the fishbowl can act as a converging lens.
Suggest one possible hazard of leaving the fishbowl next to the window in bright sunlight.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that includes a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V.
12 V
A V
20 Ω
Fig. 9.1
The reading on the ammeter is 0.15 A.
(a) Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The variable resistor is adjusted so that its resistance decreases.
(i) State what happens to the reading on the ammeter.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The battery is formed from cells of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.5 V.
(i) Explain, in terms of electrical energy, what is meant by an electromotive force (e.m.f.)
of 1.5 V.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State how many 1.5 V cells are connected in series to form the battery.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) A bar magnet is held with its N-pole just inside one end of a coil.
Fig. 10.1 shows the coil connected to a galvanometer that has the zero mark in the centre of
the scale.
L
N S
Fig. 10.1
The magnet is pulled horizontally to the right at a constant speed through a large distance.
(i) State what happens to the galvanometer reading as time passes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the magnet moves, an N-pole is produced at the left-hand end L of the coil.
Explain why the pole at L is an N-pole.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A transformer has NP turns on the primary coil and NS turns on the secondary coil. The
transformer is used in a school laboratory as a 12 V alternating current (a.c.) supply. The
transformer is powered from the 240 V a.c. mains supply.
(i) Determine the turns ratio NP / NS of the transformer.
NP / NS = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The laboratory 12 V a.c. supply is rectified to produce a direct current (d.c.) supply.
Underline the component that the rectification circuit must include.
AND gate diode NOT gate potentiometer thermistor

[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
15
11 (a) State the type of radioactive emission that causes
(i) the proton number of a nuclide to increase by 1,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the nucleon number of a nuclide to decrease by 4,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) no change in the proton number and no change in the nucleon number of a nuclide.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The isotope radon-220 is radioactive and it decays by α-particle emission.
(i) Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of α-particles entering the electric field between two charged
plates.
charged plate
+ + + + + + + + + +
electric
field
beam of
α-particles
– – – – – – – – – –
charged plate
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, sketch the path that the beam of α-particles follows in the electric field. [1]
(ii) The half-life of radon-220 is 56 s.
A sample of this isotope contains 7.2 × 106 atoms.
Predict the number of α-particles that the radon-220 in the sample emits in the next
168 s.
number of α-particles emitted = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

* 8 1 9 2 3 7 7 3 5 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 151945/4
2
1 A train of mass 5.6 × 105 kg is at rest in a station.
At time t = 0 s, a resultant force acts on the train and it starts to accelerate forwards.
Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for the train for the first 120 s.
5000
distance / m
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Use Fig. 1.1 to determine:
1. the average speed of the train during the 120 s
average speed = ...........................................................[1]
2. the speed of the train at time t = 100 s.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

3
(ii) Describe how the acceleration of the train at time t = 100 s differs from the acceleration
at time t = 20 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) The initial acceleration of the train is 0.75 m / s2.
Calculate the resultant force that acts on the train at this time.
resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) At time t = 120 s, the train begins to decelerate.
State what is meant by deceleration.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform plank AB of length 2.0 m suspended from two ropes X and Y.
P Q
1.5 m
rope X rope Y
A B
0.5 m
W = 210 N
Fig. 2.1
The weight W of the plank is 210 N. The force in rope X is P. The force in rope Y is Q.
(a) State, in terms of P, the moment of force P about B.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate:
(i) the moment of W about B
moment = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the force P
force P = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the force Q.
force Q = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

5
3 (a) State what is meant by the principle of conservation of energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a girl throwing a heavy ball.
ball
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the energy changes that take place from when the girl begins to exert a force on
the ball until the ball hits the ground and stops moving.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the ball is 4.0 kg. The girl exerts a force on the ball for 0.60 s. The speed of
the ball increases from 0 m / s to 12 m / s before it leaves the girl’s hand.
Calculate:
1. the momentum of the ball on leaving the girl’s hand
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the average resultant force exerted on the ball.
average resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows liquid in a cylinder.
cylinder
liquid
Fig. 4.1
The depth of the liquid is 10 cm and the radius of the cylinder is 3.0 cm. The weight of the
liquid in the cylinder is 2.5 N.
density = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a device that measures the pressure of a gas supply.
gas supply
liquid
Fig. 4.2
(i) State the name of the device. .......................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

7
(ii) The difference h between the two liquid levels is 2.0 cm. The density of the liquid is
800 kg / m3.
Calculate the difference between the pressure of the gas and atmospheric pressure.
pressure difference = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) A similar device with a tube of smaller cross-sectional area is connected to a gas supply
at the same pressure.
State and explain any effect on the value of h.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

8
5 (a) (i) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the structure of a thermocouple
thermometer. Include the device from which a reading is taken.
[3]
(ii) A thermocouple thermometer is used to measure the temperature of the flame of a small
candle.
State two reasons why the thermocouple thermometer is suitable for this application.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State and explain any effect on the sensitivity of a liquid-in-glass thermometer of:
(i) reducing the diameter of the capillary tube
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) increasing the volume of the liquid-filled bulb.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

9
6 (a) State three factors that determine the rate of evaporation of water.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A person climbs out of a swimming pool and stands in the open air.
Explain why evaporation of water from the surface of the person’s body causes the person to
feel cold.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

10
7 (a) A laser produces a beam of monochromatic light. State what is meant by the term
monochromatic.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A wave, in air, is incident on a glass block. Fig. 7.1 shows the wavefronts at the air-glass
boundary. The arrow shows the direction of travel of the wavefronts.
direction of
travel of
wavefronts
air
glass
Fig. 7.1
The wave undergoes reflection and refraction at the air-glass boundary.
On Fig. 7.1 draw:
(i) the wavefronts of the reflected wave [3]
(ii) the wavefronts of the refracted wave. [3]
(c) A transverse wave is produced in a long, horizontal rope. The rope is much longer than the
wavelength of the wave.
In the space below, sketch a diagram to show the appearance of the rope as the wave passes
along it. Label two important features of the wave.
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18
11
8 A vibrating source on a ship produces a sound wave that travels through the ocean. The wave
produced is a longitudinal wave.
(a) Explain what is meant by the term longitudinal wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The frequency of the sound wave is 800 Hz.
(i) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
State a typical value for the speed of sound in a liquid.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Using your value from (b)(i), calculate the wavelength of the sound wave in the ocean.
wavelength = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows the symbol for a 12 V battery.
12 V
Fig. 9.1
(a) Two lamps are connected in parallel with the battery. On Fig. 9.1, using the correct symbols,
complete the circuit diagram. [1]
(b) One of these lamps has a resistance of 6.0 Ω.
Calculate, for this lamp:
(i) the current
current = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the power.
power = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The power of the other lamp is 36 W.
Calculate the total energy delivered to this lamp in 20 hours.
energy = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

13
10 A transformer consists of two coils of wire wound on a metal core. Fig. 10.1 represents the
transformer.
core
primary coil secondary coil
Fig. 10.1
(a) State the name of the metal from which the core is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The primary coil of the transformer is connected to the output voltage of an a.c. generator
which supplies an alternating current.
(i) Explain why there is a voltage between the two terminals of the secondary coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) There are 560 turns on the primary coil and 910 turns on the secondary coil of the
transformer. The voltage between the two terminals of the secondary coil is 78 V.
Calculate the voltage supplied by the a.c. generator.
generator voltage = ............................................................[2]
(c) Transformers are used to increase the voltage when electrical energy is transmitted in cables
across long distances.
Explain why power losses in the cables are lower when the voltage is high.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

14
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows data about nine elements.
proton number element symbol

2 helium He
3 lithium Li
4 beryllium Be
5 boron B
6 carbon C
7 nitrogen N
8 oxygen O
9 fluorine F
10 neon Ne
Fig. 11.1
Carbon-14 is a radioactive isotope with a nucleon number of 14. It decays by emitting

β-particles.
Use any data you need from Fig. 11.1 to write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

15
(b) A radioactive sample is placed close to a detector. The radioactive isotope in the sample has
a long half-life. The detector records a count rate of 597 counts / s.
Fig. 11.2 shows the readings when different materials are placed between the radioactive
sample and the detector.
count rate
material
counts / s
a sheet of paper 602
a piece of thin aluminium 598
a piece of thin lead 510
Fig. 11.2
Explain whether any α-particles, β-particles or γ-rays are emitted by the radioactive sample.
α-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
β-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
γ-rays ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

* 6 7 5 4 0 7 4 2 4 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 151944/4
2
1 A lorry is travelling along a straight, horizontal road.
Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for the lorry.
3000
distance / m
2000
1000
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Using Fig. 1.1, determine:
(i) the speed of the lorry at time t = 30 s
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average speed of the lorry between time t = 60 s and time t = 120 s.
average speed = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

3
(b) At time t = 30 s, the total resistive force acting on the lorry is 1.4 × 104 N.
(i) Using Fig. 1.1, determine the magnitude of the acceleration of the lorry at time t = 30 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Determine the forward force on the lorry due to its engine at time t = 30 s.
forward force = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Describe the motion of the lorry between time t = 60 s and time t = 130 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) Fig 2.1 shows liquid in a cylinder.
cylinder
liquid
Fig. 2.1
Table 2.1 gives some data about the cylinder and the liquid.
Table 2.1
radius of cylinder 3.5 cm

weight of empty cylinder 2.5 N
depth of liquid 12.0 cm
density of liquid 900 kg / m3
The cylinder containing liquid is placed on a digital balance that displays the mass in kg.
Calculate the reading shown on the balance.
reading ...................................................... kg [4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

5
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a device that measures the pressure of a gas.
gas supply
glass tube
liquid 50 mm
Fig. 2.2
(i) State the name of the device. .......................................................................................[1]
(ii) The pressure of the gas is 400 Pa greater than atmospheric pressure.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) With the gas supply connected, the top of the tube on the left of the device is sealed
securely with a rubber stopper. The gas pressure is then increased.
State and explain what happens to the liquid in the device.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

6
3 (a) The velocity of an object of mass m increases from u to v.
State, in terms of m, u and v, the change of momentum of the object.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In a game of tennis, a player hits a stationary ball with his racquet.
(i) The racquet is in contact with the ball for 6.0 ms. The average force on the ball during
this time is 400 N.
Calculate the impulse on the tennis ball.
impulse = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the ball is 0.056 kg.
Calculate the speed with which the ball leaves the racquet.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) State the energy transfer that takes place:
1. as the ball changes shape during the contact between the racquet and the ball
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. as the ball leaves the racquet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

7
BLANK PAGE

8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus used by a student to measure the specific heat capacity of iron.
thermometer
electric heater
iron block
Fig. 4.1
(a) The student improves the accuracy of the experiment by placing material around the block,
as shown in Fig. 4.2.
material
Fig. 4.2
(i) Suggest the name of a possible material the student could use and explain how it
improves the accuracy of the experiment.
suggestion .........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

9
(ii) State how the student could further improve the accuracy of the experiment by using
more of the material used in Fig. 4.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The current in the heater is 3.8 A and the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 12 V. The iron
block has a mass of 2.0 kg. When the heater is switched on for 10 minutes, the temperature
of the block rises from 25 °C to 55 °C.
Calculate the specific heat capacity of iron.
specific heat capacity = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 8]

10
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a visible spectrum focused on a screen by passing light from a source of white
light through a lens and a prism.
glass
screen
prism
glass
lens
A
visible spectrum
B
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the name of the process that separates the colours in white light.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the colour of the light on the screen at:
point A ........................................
point B ........................................
[1]
(iii) State the property of the glass of the prism that causes white light to be split into the
different colours of the spectrum.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

11
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a section of an optical fibre in air. A ray of light is incident on the fibre wall at X.
X
optical fibre
ray of
light
Fig. 5.2
(i) On Fig. 5.2, continue the path of the ray of light up to the end of the fibre. [1]
(ii) The refractive index of the material of the fibre is 1.46. Calculate the critical angle of the
material of the fibre.
critical angle = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) State two uses of optical fibres.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 represents a sound wave of wavelength 0.45 m travelling from left to right.
(a) On Fig. 6.1:
(i) at the centre of a compression, mark a cross and label it C [1]
(ii) at the centre of a rarefaction, mark a cross and label it R [1]
(iii) draw a double-headed arrow to represent a distance of 0.90 m. [1]
(b) The frequency of the wave is 750 Hz.
Calculate the speed of the wave.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest a medium through which the sound wave is travelling and state your reasoning.
medium ..............................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(d) Another type of wave that consists of compressions and rarefactions is ultrasound.
(i) State one other similarity between sound of frequency 750 Hz and ultrasound.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State one way in which sound of frequency 750 Hz is different from ultrasound.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

13
BLANK PAGE

14
7 Fig. 7.1 shows three identical lamps and an ammeter connected to a power supply.
power
supply
Fig. 7.1
The switches are closed. Each lamp is rated at 60 W and operates at its normal working voltage of
110 V.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the current in each lamp
current = ............................................................[2]
(ii) the current in the ammeter
current = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the voltage of the power supply.
voltage = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

15
(b) (i) Calculate the resistance of the filament of one of the lamps when working normally.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Another lamp X has a filament with twice the resistance of each lamp in the circuit of
Fig. 7.1. The material and the temperature of the filament in lamp X is the same as the
filaments in the lamps in Fig. 7.1.
In Table 7.1, tick any box in the right-hand column that shows a possible difference
between the filament of lamp X and a filament of one of the lamps in the circuit.
Table 7.1
X has half the length

X has twice the length
X has one quarter the area of cross-section
X has half the area of cross-section
X has two times the area of cross-section
X has four times the area of cross-section
[2]
[Total: 8]

16
8 (a) (i) Fig. 8.1 shows a positively charged cube of insulating material. The cube is fixed to a
piece of wood that is floating on water. A negatively charged rod is held above the piece
of wood and brought close to the cube, as shown.
positively charged cube

of insulating material
negatively charged rod
+ – –
+ –
+
piece of wood
floating on water
Fig. 8.1
State and explain any movement of the piece of wood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Fig. 8.2 shows two cubes of insulating material. One is positively charged and the other
is negatively charged. The cubes are fixed to a piece of wood that is floating on water.
Charged rods are held above the piece of wood and brought close to the cubes, as
shown.
negatively charged cube negatively charged rod

of insulating material
– –
–
+ positively charged cube
– +
– + of insulating material
–
+ +
piece of wood
floating on water
positively charged rod
Fig. 8.2
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

17
State and explain any movement of the piece of wood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In terms of a simple electron model, describe the differences between conductors and
insulators.
conductors ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
insulators ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) On Fig. 8.3, draw the electric field pattern around a single point positive charge.
Fig. 8.3
[1]
[Total: 7]

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a permanent bar magnet next to a circuit that contains a coil and a galvanometer.
N S
Fig. 9.1
(a) Suggest a metal from which the magnet is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The magnet is moved to the left and inserted a small distance into the coil. The galvanometer
deflects briefly and shows that there is a current in the coil.
(i) Explain why there is a current in the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the magnet is moving near to the coil, end Q of the coil behaves as a magnetic pole.
State the polarity of end Q and explain why it has this polarity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Suggest two ways in which the deflection of the galvanometer can be reversed.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

19
10 (a) A detector of ionising radiation measures the background count rate in a classroom where
there are no radioactive samples present.
The readings, in counts/minute, taken over a period of time are shown in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1
counts / minute 16 12 14 16 15 17
(i) State two possible sources of this background radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the readings are not the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) With no radioactive sample present, a scientist records a background radiation count of
40 counts / minute.
He brings a radioactive sample close to the detector. The count rate increases to
200 counts / minute.
After 24 days the count rate is 50 counts / minute.
Calculate the half-life of the radioactive sample.
half-life = ...........................................................[4]

20
(c) Draw a line between each type of ionising radiation and its property and another line between
the property and its use. One has been done for you.
Name of Property Use

ionising
radiation
It is the most
ionising radiation
Remotely detecting
and is most easily
X-ray leaks in underground
absorbed by very
water pipes
small amounts of
substance
Penetration is
affected by small
Detecting fractures in
α-particle changes in the
bones
amount of solid it is
passing through
It is highly
Detecting smoke in a
β-particle penetrating and is
fire alarm system
poorly ionising
Can pass easily

Detecting a change in
through soft living
the thickness of
γ-ray tissue. Calcium
aluminium foil during
absorbs more than
its manufacture
soft tissue
[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

* 6 0 7 6 5 3 3 6 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 151946/4
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for a moving car.
500
distance / m
400
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, mark a point P where the acceleration of the car is zero. [1]
(b) Determine:
(i) the speed of the car at time t = 15 s
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average speed of the car between time t = 30 s and time t = 45 s.
average speed = ...........................................................[2]
(c) At time t = 45 s, the car starts to decelerate. At time t = 55 s and at a distance of 400 m from
the starting point, the car stops. It then remains stationary for 5.0 s.
On Fig. 1.1, draw a possible continuation of the distance-time graph. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

3
2 (a) Complete Fig. 2.1 by writing in the right-hand column the name of the quantity given by the
product in the left-hand column.
product quantity
mass × acceleration
force × time
[2]
Fig. 2.1
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a man hitting a ball with a golf club.
golf club ball
Fig. 2.2
The ball has a mass of 0.046 kg. The golf club is in contact with the ball for 5.0 × 10–4 s and
the ball leaves the golf club at a speed of 65 m / s.
(i) Calculate:
1. the momentum of the ball as it leaves the golf club
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the average resultant force acting on the ball while it is in contact with the golf club.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) While the golf club is in contact with the ball, the ball becomes compressed and changes
shape.
State the type of energy stored in the ball during its contact with the golf club.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

4
3 The density of mercury is 1.4 × 104 kg / m3.
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows an instrument that is being used to determine the atmospheric pressure.
space A
760 mm
mercury
(i) State the name of the instrument.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what is in space A.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate the atmospheric pressure.
atmospheric pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows mercury stored in a cylindrical glass jar of internal radius 4.0 cm. The depth of
mercury in the jar is 12 cm.
mercury
12 cm
8.0 cm
Calculate the weight of mercury in the jar.
weight = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18
5
4 A wave is travelling across the surface of water in a tank at a speed of 0.15 m / s.
(a) The wavelength of the wave is 0.030 m.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(b) This water wave is a transverse wave.
(i) Explain what is meant by the term transverse wave motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Draw a diagram that represents a transverse wave travelling from left to right across the
page. On your diagram, label:
• the wavelength
• the amplitude.
[3]
[Total: 8]

6
5 (a) A student is supplied with a small block of iron, a thermometer and an electrical heater of
power P.
There are two holes drilled in the iron block. The heater fits tightly into one hole and the
student places the thermometer into the other hole.
Fig. 5.1 shows the equipment.
cable
thermometer
heater
iron block
Fig. 5.1
The student uses this equipment when determining the specific heat capacity of iron.
State:
• the other equipment the student will need

• the measurements the student needs to take
• the equation used when calculating the value of the specific heat capacity of iron.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

7
(b) In the student’s home there is a wood-burning stove, which is also made of iron. The mass of
the wood-burning stove is 85 kg.
(i) State what is meant by the thermal capacity of an object.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The specific heat capacity of iron is 460 J / (kg °C).

Calculate the thermal capacity of the wood-burning stove.
thermal capacity = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows white light incident at point X on a glass prism.
screen
prism
ray of white light
Fig. 6.1
(i) From point X on Fig. 6.1, draw a ray of red light, labelled R and a ray of violet light,
labelled V, to show how a spectrum is formed on the screen. [2]
(ii) State the colour of light in the visible spectrum with the shortest wavelength.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The critical angle for a type of glass is 42°.
Fig. 6.2 and Fig. 6.3 show two prisms ABC and PQR made of this type of glass. A ray of
monochromatic red light passes into each of the prisms.
A P
45° normal 60° Y normal
45° 60°
B C Q R
Fig. 6.2 Fig. 6.3
(i) State what is meant by monochromatic light.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

9
(ii) Describe and explain what happens to the ray of light in Fig. 6.2 as it strikes side AC of
the prism.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Describe and explain what happens to the ray of light in Fig. 6.3 as it strikes the glass at
point Y.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]

10
7 A defibrillator is a machine that sends an electrical charge through the heart of a patient whose
heart is not beating correctly. Doctors learn to use a defibrillator by practising on a medical dummy.
Fig. 7.1 shows the two contacts of a defibrillator attached to a medical dummy.
contacts
defibrillator
medical
dummy
Fig. 7.1
The contacts that touch the dummy are made from metal, and when the defibrillator is being used,
one contact becomes strongly negatively charged and the other contact becomes strongly positively
charged. The handles of the contacts are made from plastic, which is an electrical insulator.
(a) (i) State how the structure of an electrical insulator differs from the structure of a conductor.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why the handles are made from an electrical insulator.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of the particles involved, how one contact becomes negatively charged and
how the other contact becomes positively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The defibrillator passes a charge of 9.1 × 10–3 C through the medical dummy in 6.5 × 10–4 s.
Calculate the average current in the dummy.
current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18
11
8 A 9.0 V battery is connected to a 120 Ω resistor in series with wire P.

Fig. 8.1 shows a voltmeter connected across the 120 Ω resistor.
9.0 V
120 Ω
P
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the energy changes that are taking place in the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The reading on the voltmeter is 2.4 V.
Calculate:
(i) the current in the 120 Ω resistor
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the potential difference (p.d.) across wire P
p.d. = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the resistance of wire P.
resistance = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Wire P has a diameter d and a length l. A second piece of wire Q is made of the same
material as P.
The diameter of wire Q is 0.50 × d and its length is 5.0 × l.
Calculate the resistance of wire Q.
resistance = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 10]
12
9 (a) Describe how a direct current (d.c.) differs from an alternating current (a.c.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows how the voltage output of an a.c. generator varies with time.
8.0
voltage / V
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / s
–2.0
–4.0
–6.0
–8.0
Fig. 9.1
A heater is connected directly to the a.c. generator and the maximum current in the heater is
0.75 A.
(i) On Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to indicate how the current in the heater varies with time.
1.00
current / A
0.75
0.50
0.25
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / s
–0.25
–0.50
–0.75
–1.00
[1]
Fig. 9.2
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

13
(ii) Calculate the power produced by the heater when the current is 0.75 A.
power = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 9.3 shows the coil ABCD of the a.c. generator between two magnetic poles.
rotation
direction
B C
N A D S
Fig. 9.3
(i) On Fig. 9.3, draw a straight arrow to indicate the direction in which side AB of the coil is
moving. Label this arrow M. [1]
(ii) Deduce the direction of the current induced in side AB of the coil and explain your
reasoning.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) The rate at which the coil of the a.c. generator rotates increases.
State two ways in which the alternating voltage changes.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
14
10 Thorium-234 (23940Th) is radioactive. It decays by β-emission to form an isotope of protactinium

(Pa).
(a) Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
..... .....
234Th Pa + β
90 ..... .....
[2]
(b) A pure sample of thorium-234 emits β-particles at a count rate of 2480 counts / second.
The half-life of thorium-234 is 24 days.
Calculate the count rate for the emission of β-particles from the thorium in the sample after
72 days have passed.
count rate ...........................................................[3]
(c) The isotope of protactinium in (a) is also radioactive. It decays by β-emission and has a
half-life of 70 seconds.
State and explain how this would affect the observed count rate for the sample in (b) after
72 days.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

PMT

* 0 3 4 2 0 2 1 6 5 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (LK/FD) 125811/7
PMT
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows the axes used to plot distance-time graphs.
distance
0
0 time
Fig. 1.1
On Fig. 1.1, draw graphs for an object that is
(i) moving with constant speed, labelling the graph A,
(ii) moving with decreasing speed, labelling the graph B. [2]
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the axes used to plot speed-time graphs.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, draw graphs for an object that is
(i) moving with constant acceleration, labelling the graph S,
(ii) moving with increasing acceleration, labelling the graph T. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

PMT
(c) A plane is at rest on an airport runway. The brakes of the plane are released and the engine
of the plane provides a constant accelerating force.
Using the following data, calculate the take-off speed of the plane. Ignore any resistive forces.
constant forward force = 56 000 N

mass of plane = 16 000 kg
time of travel along runway = 16 s
speed = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 8]

PMT
2 (a) Explain why momentum is a vector quantity.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The crumple zone at the front of a car is designed to collapse during a collision.
concrete wall
crumple
zone
Fig. 2.1
In a laboratory test, a car of mass 1200 kg is driven into a concrete wall, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
A video recording of the test shows that the car is brought to rest in 0.36 s when it collides
with the wall. The speed of the car before the collision is 7.5 m / s.
Calculate
(i) the change of momentum of the car,
change of momentum = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average force acting on the car.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

PMT
(c) A different car has a mass of 1500 kg. It collides with the same wall and all of the energy
transferred during the collision is absorbed by the crumple zone.
(i) The energy absorbed by the crumple zone is 4.3 × 105 J. Show that the speed of the car
before the collision is 24 m / s.
[2]
(ii) Suggest what would happen to the car if it is travelling faster than 24 m / s when it hits
the wall.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
3 (a) A stationary object is acted upon by a number of forces.
State the conditions which must be true if the object
(i) does not accelerate,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) does not rotate.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a boat that has been lifted out of a river. The boat is suspended by two ropes.
It is stationary.
T1 T2
C P
1.20 m 0.40 m
24 kN
The weight of the boat, acting at the centre of mass, is 24 kN. The tensions in the ropes are
T1 and T2.
Determine
(i) the moment of the weight of the boat about the point P,
moment = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the tension T1,
T1 = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) the tension T2.
T2 = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17
PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a Galilean thermometer. This thermometer is used to measure the approximate
temperature of the surrounding air.
bulb E, label: 28 °C
glass cylinder bulb D, label: 26 °C

bulb C, label: 24 °C
bulb B, label: 22 °C
water
bulb A, label: 20 °C
Fig. 4.1
The glass cylinder contains water. When the temperature of the water changes, so does its density.
Each bulb has a label printed with a temperature, as shown in Fig. 4.1. The bulbs have different
densities. At 21 °C, only bulb A is at the bottom of the cylinder.
(a) Explain, in terms of density, why bulb A is at the bottom of the cylinder and the other bulbs are
floating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The temperature of the surrounding air increases to a temperature above 23 °C.
(i) Suggest one reason why there is a delay before the temperature of the water increases
to 23 °C.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why, after this delay, bulb B sinks. Assume the bulbs do not expand.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Bulbs A, B and C are now at the bottom of the cylinder. Bulbs D and E are floating.
State the possible temperature range of the water in the cylinder.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
PMT
5 (a) (i) State two ways in which evaporation is different from boiling.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Give one example of a change of state which does not involve boiling or evaporation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The graph in Fig. 5.1 shows the variation of temperature with time for a substance that is
initially liquid.
temperature
A
B
time
Fig. 5.1
(i) State what is taking place at points A, B and C. You should say what changes of state, if
any, are taking place.
point A ...............................................................................................................................
point B ................................................................................................................................
point C ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Suggest why the graph is steeper at point C than at point A.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

PMT
6 Fig. 6.1 shows apparatus that is used to demonstrate some effects of the transfer of energy by
radiation.
glass bulb
painted heater shiny
matt black glass bulb
glass tube glass tube
air air
liquid
Fig. 6.1
The glass bulb painted matt black, the shiny glass bulb and the spaces above the liquid in the tube
all contain air.
The heater glows red when switched on. The heater is the same distance from each bulb.
(a) State the two types of radiation that are emitted by the heater.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) Before the heater is switched on, the liquid levels in the glass tube are the same.
State and explain any changes in the liquid levels that take place when the heater is
switched on.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 5]

PMT
10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an object and its image formed by a converging lens. One ray from the tip of the
object to the tip of the image is shown.
Fig. 7.1 is drawn full size.
lens
object
image
Fig. 7.1
(a) Place a tick (3) in all boxes that correctly describe the image.
diminished
enlarged
inverted
upright
real
virtual
[2]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw a ray, passing through a principal focus of the lens, from the tip of the object
to the tip of the image. Label the principal focus F. [1]
(c) Use the ray you have drawn in (b) to determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ...........................................................[1]
(d) Draw another ray, not passing through a principal focus of the lens, that passes from the tip
of the object to the tip of the image. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

PMT
11
8 (a) A transformer consists of two coils of wire wound on a core.
(i) Suggest the material from which the two coils are made. State the reason for using this
material.
material ..............................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest the material from which the core is made. State the reason for using this
material.
material ..............................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 8.1 represents the system of transmission of electrical energy from a power station to a
home that is a long distance away.
132 kV
transformer X transformer Y
transmission
power cables and
22 kV 240 V
station pylons home
Fig. 8.1
(i) State the difference between transformer X and transformer Y.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why a very high voltage is used for transmission over large distances.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) Suggest why the voltage for use by a home consumer is 240 V, and not a much higher
value.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
PMT
12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a graph of current against potential difference (p.d.) for a filament lamp.
0.80
current / A
0.60
0.40
0.20
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
p.d. / V
Fig. 9.1
(a) State what happens to the resistance of the filament of the lamp as the p.d. changes
(i) from 0 V to 1.0 V,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) from 1.0 V to 8.0 V.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) At normal brightness, the p.d. across the lamp is 8.0 V.
Calculate, for normal brightness,
(i) the resistance of the lamp,
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the power of the lamp.
power = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

PMT
13
(c) Five of these lamps, operating at normal brightness, are connected in parallel to a power
supply.
power supply
Fig. 9.2
Determine
(i) the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the power supply,
e.m.f. = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the current from the power supply.
current = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
14
10 (a) Describe, in terms of particles and the terminals of the battery, the movement of charge in an
electric circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a lightning flash between a cloud and the ground beneath.
cloud
lightning flash
ground
Fig. 10.1
The charge built up on the cloud before the lightning flash is 0.60 C. This charge is completely
transferred to the ground by the lightning flash in 5.0 × 10–5 s (0.000050 s).
(i) Calculate the current between the cloud and the ground.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) between the cloud and the ground during the lightning flash is
2.5 × 108 V.
Calculate the energy transferred during the lightning flash.
energy = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) Suggest what happens to the energy calculated in (b)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

PMT
15
11 A radioactive source is placed 20 mm from a radiation detector, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
lead
source
narrow beam detector
of radiation
20 mm
The initial count rate recorded by the detector is 150 counts / s.
A sheet of paper is placed between the source and the detector. The count rate recorded by the
detector falls to 60 counts / s.
With the paper still in place, a magnetic field is set up perpendicular to the direction of the radiation.
The count rate recorded by the detector falls to 20 counts / s.
The count rates have not been corrected for background. The background count is measured as
20 counts / s.
(a) State the evidence that each type of radiation is present in, or absent from, the radiation
emitted by the source.
α-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
β-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
γ-rays ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[5]

PMT
16
(b) Determine how much of the original count rate of 150 counts / s, if any, is due to each type of
radiation.
α-particles ................................................ counts / s
β-particles ................................................ counts / s
γ-rays ................................................ counts / s

[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

PMT

* 8 0 5 8 1 5 8 7 1 3 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
DC (ST/JG) 129077/7
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for an ice skater.
12
speed
m/s
10
0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Explain what is meant by deceleration.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Use Fig. 1.1 to determine
(i) the distance travelled between times t = 3.0 s and t = 6.0 s,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

PMT
(ii) the deceleration between times t = 3.0 s and t = 6.0 s.
deceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(c) (i) State what happens to the size of the deceleration after time t = 6.0 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what happens to the resultant force on the skater after time t = 6.0 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
2 A footballer kicks a ball vertically upwards. Initially, the ball is stationary.
(a) His boot is in contact with the ball for 0.050 s. The average resultant force on the ball during
this time is 180 N. The ball leaves his foot at 20 m / s.
Calculate
(i) the impulse of the force acting on the ball,
impulse = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the mass of the ball,
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the height to which the ball rises. Ignore air resistance.
height = ...........................................................[3]
(b) While the boot is in contact with the ball, the ball is no longer spherical.
State the word used to describe the energy stored in the ball.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

PMT
3 Fig. 3.1 shows remote sensing equipment on the surface of a distant planet.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of the equipment is 350 kg. The acceleration of free fall on the surface of this planet
is 7.5 m / s2.
(i) State what is meant by the term weight.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the weight of the equipment on the planet.
weight = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The equipment releases a balloon from a point that is a small distance above the surface
of the planet. The atmosphere at the surface of this planet has a density of 0.35 kg / m3. The
inflated balloon has a mass of 80 g and a volume of 0.30 m3.
Make an appropriate calculation and then predict and explain the direction of any motion of
the balloon. Show your working.
prediction ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 7]

PMT
4 (a) A 240 V, 60 W lamp is connected to a 240 V supply. The lamp has a constant temperature.
State
(i) the rate at which the lamp transfers energy to the surroundings,
rate = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the names of the thermal processes by which the lamp transfers energy to the
surroundings.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a thick copper block that has been heated to 400 °C. One side of the block is
dull black. The other side of the block is polished and shiny.
thermometer A thermometer B
copper block
dull black surface polished shiny surface
Fig. 4.1
(i) In Experiment 1, the thermometer bulbs are both painted black. They are placed at equal
distances from the surfaces of the block. The maximum temperature shown by each
thermometer is recorded.
Explain any difference between the maximum temperature shown by the two
thermometers.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

PMT
(ii) In Experiment 2, the thermometer bulbs are both shiny silver-coloured. They are placed
at the same distances from the surfaces of the block as in Experiment 1.
State and explain any differences that are observed in the maximum temperatures
shown by the thermometers in Experiments 1 and 2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows a firefighter wearing shiny silver-coloured clothing.
Fig. 4.2
State the benefit to a firefighter of wearing shiny silver-coloured clothing.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows some gas trapped in a metal cylinder by a piston.
metal cylinder
piston
gas
Fig. 5.1
(a) The position of the piston is fixed. The cylinder is moved from a cold room to a warm room.
Explain, in terms of molecules, what happens to the pressure of the gas in the cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) The piston is now released. It moves to the right and finally stops.
Explain these observations in terms of the pressure and the volume of the gas in the cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

PMT
6 (a) A ray of light in glass is incident on a boundary with air.
State what happens to the ray when the angle of incidence of the ray is
(i) less than the critical angle of the glass,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) greater than the critical angle of the glass.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light incident on a glass block at A. The critical angle of the glass
is 41°.
air
B
30°
ray of light
glass block
(i) On Fig. 6.1, without calculation, continue the ray from point B until it leaves the glass
block. [2]
(ii) Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
[Total: 6]

PMT
10
7 A loudspeaker produces a sound wave of constant frequency.
(a) State what is meant by frequency.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The sound wave travels in air towards a barrier with a small gap at its centre. Fig. 7.1
represents the compressions of the wave travelling towards the barrier.
gap barrier
direction
of travel
compression barrier
Fig. 7.1
(i) State what is meant by a compression.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The width of the gap is smaller than the wavelength λ of the wave.
On Fig. 7.1, draw the pattern of the compressions after the sound wave has passed
through the gap. [2]
(iii) The barrier is adjusted so that the gap becomes wider.
Describe how this affects the pattern of the compressions after the sound wave has
passed through the gap.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

PMT
11
(c) The frequency of the sound wave is 6800 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.
(i) Calculate the wavelength of the sound wave in air.
wavelength = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) State a typical value for the speed of sound in a liquid.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
12
8 A bar magnet is made of metal.
(a) Suggest a metal from which the bar magnet is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows the bar magnet being inserted into a coil of wire. The N-pole and the S-pole of
the bar magnet are marked.
movement coil
of magnet
S N
Fig. 8.1
The coil is connected to a galvanometer.
(i) Explain why the galvanometer deflects as the bar magnet is being inserted into the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain what determines the direction of the reading on the galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Describe a method for demagnetising a bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

PMT
13
9 (a) The resistance of a circuit component varies with the brightness of the light falling on its
surface.
(i) State the name of the component.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Draw the circuit symbol for this component.
[1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a 6.0 V battery connected in series with a 1.2 kΩ resistor and a thermistor.
1.2 kΩ
6.0 V
Fig. 9.1
(i) At a certain temperature, the resistance of the thermistor is 2.4 kΩ.
Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = ...........................................................[4]
(ii) The battery connected to the circuit in Fig. 9.1 is not changed.
Suggest a change that would cause the reading of the voltmeter to decrease.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
PMT
14
10 (a) Describe the movement of charge that causes an object to become positively charged.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a negatively charged rod held over an uncharged metal sphere.
negatively
charged rod
– – – – – – – – –
uncharged metal sphere
insulating support
Fig. 10.1
(i) On Fig. 10.1, add + and – signs to represent the results of the movement of charge
within the sphere. [2]
(ii) Describe the actions that must be taken to obtain an even distribution of positive charge
on the surface of the sphere.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

PMT
15
11 (a) A radioactive source is tested over a number of hours with a radiation detector. The readings
are shown in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1
time / hours 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
detector reading / (counts / s) 324 96 39 23 21 17 21 20 19 20 18
Use the readings to suggest a value for the background count rate during the test, and to
determine the half-life of the sample.
background count rate = ...............................................................
half-life of sample = ...............................................................

[4]
(b) Hydrogen-3 (tritium) has one proton and two neutrons. The nucleon number of tritium is three.
It decays by emitting a β-particle.
Complete the nuclide equation to show this decay. The symbol X represents the nuclide
produced by this decay.
........... ........... ...........

........... H ........... β + ........... X
[3]

PMT
16
(c) The arrows in Fig. 11.1 show the paths of three α-particles moving towards gold nuclei in a
thin foil.
gold nucleus
gold nucleus
gold nucleus
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the three α-particles. [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

* 2 0 9 4 7 7 2 0 8 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/JG) 129079/5
2
1 (a) (i) Speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity.
State how a scalar quantity differs from a vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Underline the two scalar quantities in the list below.
energy force impulse momentum temperature [1]
(b) A boat is moving at constant speed.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a distance-time graph for the boat.
distance
time
Fig. 1.1
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

3
(c) The boat in (b) is moving due west at a speed of 6.5 m / s relative to the water. The water is
moving due south at 3.5 m / s.
In the space below, draw a scale diagram to determine the size and direction of the resultant
of these two velocities. State the scale used.
scale ...............................................................
size of resultant velocity = ...............................................................
direction of resultant ...............................................................

[4]
[Total: 7]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a vehicle designed to be used on the Moon.
Fig. 2.1
The brakes of the vehicle are tested on Earth.

1
(a) The acceleration of free fall on the Moon is one sixth ( 6 ) of its value on Earth.
Tick one box in each column of the table to predict the value of that quantity when the vehicle
is used on the Moon, compared to the test on Earth.
mass of vehicle on weight of vehicle on deceleration of vehicle

Moon Moon on Moon with same
braking force
10 # value on Earth
6 # value on Earth
same as value on Earth
1
# value on Earth
6
1
# value on Earth
10
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

5
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the brake pedal of the vehicle.
pivot
piston
cylinder
7.0 cm
24 cm
link
oil force exerted
by driver
pedal
The driver exerts a force on the pedal, which increases the pressure in the oil to operate the
brakes.
The area of the piston in the cylinder is 6.5 # 10–4 m2 (0.00065 m2). The pressure increase in
the oil is 5.0 # 105 Pa (500 000 Pa).
Calculate the force exerted by the driver on the brake pedal.
force = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

6
3 (a) Underline the pair of quantities which must be multiplied together to calculate impulse.
force and mass force and velocity mass and time
time and velocity weight and velocity force and time [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a collision between two blocks A and B on a smooth, horizontal surface.
A B A B
3.0 m / s v
2.4 kg 1.2 kg
before collision after collision
Fig. 3.1
Before the collision, block A, of mass 2.4 kg, is moving at 3.0 m / s. Block B, of mass 1.2 kg, is
at rest.
After the collision, blocks A and B stick together and move with velocity v.
(i) Calculate
1. the momentum of block A before the collision,
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the velocity v,
velocity = ...........................................................[2]
3. the impulse experienced by block B during the collision.
impulse = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Suggest why the total kinetic energy of blocks A and B after the collision is less than the
kinetic energy of block A before the collision.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17
7
4 A balloon contains a fixed mass of gas.
(a) Explain, in terms of the momentum of molecules, how the gas in the balloon exerts a pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure of the gas increases when the volume of the
balloon decreases. The temperature of the gas is constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The initial volume of the gas is 500 cm3 and its pressure is 1.1 # 105 Pa. The volume is
reduced to 200 cm3. The temperature of the gas is constant.
Calculate the new pressure.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

8
5 (a) (i) An electric kettle contains 600 g of water at 20 °C. The heater in the kettle operates at
240 V. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
The current in the heater is 12 A.
Calculate the time taken for the temperature of the water to rise to 100 °C.
time = ...........................................................[4]
(ii) State one assumption you made in your calculation in (a)(i).
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

9
(b) Using the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1, describe an experiment to demonstrate good and bad
emitters of thermal radiation. Include the expected results and the conclusion.
You may use a diagram.
white
black side
side
metal water bottle 2 thermometers supply of hot water a ruler
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]

10
6 (a) The graph in Fig. 6.1 represents a wave on a rope.
8.0
vertical
position / cm
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
distance along rope / cm
Fig. 6.1
Using Fig. 6.1, determine
(i) the amplitude of the wave,
amplitude = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the wavelength of the wave.
wavelength = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

11
(b) A wave travelling on the surface of water has a wavelength of 2.5 cm and a speed of 8.0 cm / s.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The wave in (b) approaches a barrier that has a large gap in its centre.
Fig. 6.2 shows the crests of the wave viewed from above.
barrier
gap
direction
of wave
travel
wave crest barrier
Fig. 6.2
The gap in the barrier is larger than the wavelength λ.
(i) On Fig. 6.2, draw the pattern formed by three crests after the wave passes through the
gap in the barrier. [2]
(ii) Water is added to the tank and the speed of a wave in the deeper water is greater
than that in the shallower water. The frequency of the wave remains constant but its
wavelength is different.
1. State and explain how the wavelength in the deeper water has changed.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Apart from the change in wavelength, describe one other difference in the pattern
formed by the crests after the wave passes through the gap.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
12
7 (a) The speed of light in air is 3.0 # 108 m / s.

The speed of light in a transparent liquid is 2.0 # 108 m / s.
A ray of light is incident on the surface of the liquid at an angle of incidence of 40°.
Calculate
(i) the refractive index of the liquid,
(ii) the angle of refraction in the liquid.
angle of refraction = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

13
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a side view of an object at the bottom of a tank of liquid. Light travels slower in
this liquid than in air.
eye
air
tank
liquid
object
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the object into the air. Use these rays to locate the image.
Label this image I. [3]
[Total: 7]

14
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a 12.0 V power supply connected in a circuit.
12.0 V
resistance
wire
A X B
sliding
contact
The circuit includes a lamp and a resistance wire AB of constant cross-sectional area. There is a
sliding contact that can be moved between A and B.
(a) The rating of the lamp at normal brightness is 6.0 V, 9.0 W.
Calculate
(i) the current in the lamp at normal brightness,
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the resistance of the lamp at normal brightness.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

15
(b) AB is 1.00 m long and has a resistance of 5.0 Ω. The lamp has normal brightness when the
sliding contact is at X.
(i) The sliding contact is moved to B.
Explain, without a calculation, why the lamp becomes dimmer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the distance AX for the lamp to have normal brightness.
distance AX = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

16
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a horizontal wire PQ placed in the gap between the N pole and the S pole of a
magnet.
N S
Fig. 9.1
There is a current in the wire in the direction P to Q.

A force acts on the current-carrying wire in the magnetic field.
(a) On Fig. 9.1, draw
(i) an arrow, labelled M to show the direction of the magnetic field in the gap between the
poles of the magnet, [1]
(ii) an arrow, labelled F to show the direction of the force on the current-carrying wire due to
the magnetic field of the magnet. [1]
(b) State the effect of reversing the direction of the current in wire PQ.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The magnet is removed and the horizontal, current-carrying wire is left on its own, as shown
in Fig. 9.2.
Fig. 9.2
(i) On Fig. 9.2, sketch the pattern of the magnetic field due to the current in the wire.
Indicate the field direction. [3]
(ii) The current in PQ is increased.
State the effect of this change in current on the magnetic field.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

17
(d) A small magnet is placed at a point where the magnetic field is vertically upwards. State the
direction of the force on the S pole of the small magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

18
10 (a) In the space, draw the standard symbol for a light-emitting diode (LED).
[1]
(b) Table 10.1 shows the truth table for a logic gate.
Table 10.1

0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
State the name of the logic gate which has this truth table.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) It is possible to connect together the two inputs of the gate in (b).
Using two or more of the logic gates in (b), design a circuit with two inputs and one output
which has the truth table shown in Table 10.2.
Table 10.2
input 1 input 2 intermediate point, X output

0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
(i) Draw your circuit in the space below.

There is no need to use the symbol for the logic gate. Boxes with the two inputs and one
output are sufficient.
[2]
(ii) Label an intermediate point of your circuit with the letter X. Complete the table with the
logic levels for this point in the blank column of the table. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17
19
11 (a) The arrows in Fig. 11.1 represent the paths of three α-particles moving towards gold nuclei in
a thin foil. The gold nuclei are shown as shaded circles.
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the three α-particles. [3]

20
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows a geologist holding a radiation detector near a rock.
radiation
detector
rock
Fig. 11.2
She holds the detector in a fixed position and records the readings shown in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1
time / minutes 0 1 2 3 4 5
detector reading
16 14 17 13 17 15
counts / minute
Explain the changes in the detector readings.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A technician is handling a solid radioactive sample that emits α-particles and β-particles.
The technician wears thick rubber gloves.
Explain why this may provide some protection from the radiation, but it is not sufficient
protection.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

PMT

* 0 1 6 1 6 7 1 4 1 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (KN/JG) 129080/5
PMT
1 (a) Acceleration is a vector quantity.
Underline the two vector quantities in the list below.
energy force frequency impulse mass refractive index

[1]
(b) A car accelerates uniformly from rest at 2.2 m / s2 for 3.0 s.
(i) Calculate the speed of the car at time t = 3.0 s.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) At time t = 3.0 s, it has travelled a distance of 9.9 m.
Calculate the average speed of the car during the first 3.0 s of the journey.
speed = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) On Fig. 1.1, sketch a distance-time graph for the first 3.0 s of the journey.
10
distance / m
0
0 3.0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
2 (a) State the word equation that defines momentum.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A metal block A, travelling in a straight line at 4.0 m / s on a smooth surface, collides with a
second metal block B which is at rest. Fig. 2.1 shows the two metal blocks A and B before
and after the collision.
3.2 kg 1.6 kg
4.0 m / s at rest
before collision A B
1.5 m / s v
after collision A B
Fig. 2.1
The mass of A is 3.2 kg. The mass of B is 1.6 kg.

After the collision, the velocity of A is 1.5 m / s.
Calculate
(i) the momentum of A before the collision,
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the velocity v of B after the collision.
v = ...........................................................[3]

PMT
(c) In the collision that occurred in (b), block A and block B are in contact for 0.050 s.
Calculate the average force that is exerted on B during the collision.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
(d) After the collision in (b), the total kinetic energy of the two blocks is less than the kinetic
energy of block A before the collision.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
3 A block of wood has a volume of 210 cm3 and a mass of 180 g.
(a) Calculate the density of the block of wood.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The block is held just above the surface of a liquid of density 0.88 g / cm3.
Predict and explain what happens when the block is released.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]

PMT
4 In the braking system of a car, the brake pedal rotates about a pivot when the pedal is pressed.
Fig. 4.1 shows part of the braking system.
pivot
piston
cylinder
8.0 cm
22 cm
link
oil 200 N
pedal
The driver exerts a force of 200 N on the pedal at a distance 22 cm from the pivot. As the pedal
rotates about the pivot, a force is exerted on the piston and the pressure of the oil increases.
The area of the piston in the cylinder is 5.0 × 10 –4 m2 (0.00050 m2).
Calculate the increase in the pressure of the oil.
increase in pressure = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
5 A footballer and a referee are discussing a puddle of water that has formed on the pitch. The
footballer wears a white shirt whilst the referee wears a black shirt which, apart from its colour, is
identical.
Fig. 5.1 shows the two men looking at the puddle.
white shirt black shirt
puddle
Fig. 5.1
The weather is bright and sunny.
(a) State and explain how the temperature of the white shirt differs from the temperature of the
black shirt.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The volume of water in the puddle is slowly decreasing.
(i) Describe how two changes in the weather conditions could affect the rate at which the
puddle dries.
change 1 ...........................................................................................................................
effect ..................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
change 2 ...........................................................................................................................
effect ..................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

PMT
(ii) Explain, in terms of the water molecules, what happens as the puddle dries.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a child releasing a balloon filled with helium.
Fig. 6.1
The pressure of the helium in the balloon keeps the balloon inflated.
(a) Explain how the particles of helium produce this pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) As the balloon travels upwards through the atmosphere, the volume of the helium increases.
The temperature of the helium remains constant.
(i) State an equation that relates the volume of the helium to its pressure.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

PMT
10
(ii) Fig. 6.2 shows how the air pressure in the atmosphere changes with the height above
ground level.
120
pressure
kPa 100
80
60
40
20
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000
height / m
Fig. 6.2
1. Using Fig. 6.2, determine the pressure at ground level. Give the unit.
pressure = ............................................ unit = ......................... [2]
2. Using Fig. 6.2, determine the height at which the volume of the helium in the balloon
is twice the volume at ground level.
height = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
11
7 A loudspeaker is built into the side of a swimming pool. The loudspeaker produces sound waves
in the water of wavelength 0.25 m.
(a) (i) The frequency of the sound waves is 6.0 kHz.
Calculate the speed of the sound waves in water.
speed of sound waves in water = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) State a typical value for the speed of sound in air.
speed of sound in air = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) State and explain, for the sound produced by the loudspeaker, how the wavelength of
the sound in air compares with the wavelength of the sound in water.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Sound is a longitudinal wave.
Explain what is meant by a longitudinal wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The sound emerges from the loudspeaker through a gap. The sound diffracts as it passes
through the gap.
(i) State how the width of the gap affects the diffraction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State how the wavelength of the sound affects the diffraction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
12
8 Red light travelling in air strikes the curved surface of a semi-circular glass block at P.
Fig. 8.1 shows the ray of light.
O
red light
P air
30°
semi-circular
glass block
Fig. 8.1
The light travels in a straight line from O to Q.
(a) Explain why the light does not change direction as it enters the glass block at P.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The light travels in the glass to Q where it strikes the edge of the block at 30° to the normal.
The light then emerges into the air.
(i) The refractive index of the glass is 1.5.
Calculate the angle between the normal and the ray in the air after the light emerges
from the block at Q.
angle = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, sketch the path of the light in the air after it emerges at Q. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
13
(c) The direction of the light striking the curved surface of the glass block is changed. The angle
between the ray and the normal at Q gradually increases from 30° to 90°.
Describe what happens to the light that strikes the block at Q as this angle increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

PMT
14
9 A 12 V battery is connected in series to a 24 W lamp and to a parallel pair of identical resistors X

and Y. Fig. 9.1 is the circuit diagram.
12 V
A B
Y
Fig. 9.1
The 24 W lamp lights at normal brightness when the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 6.0 V.
The lamp is at normal brightness.
(a) Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Determine
(i) the p.d. between A and B,
p.d. = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the combined resistance of the parallel pair of identical resistors X and Y,
resistance = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the resistance of X.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
15
(c) Resistor X is removed from the circuit in Fig 9.1.
Explain why the lamp becomes dimmer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
16
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a transformer that consists of two coils P and Q, and an iron core.
iron core
coil P coil Q
200 turns 340 turns
Fig. 10.1
There are 200 turns on coil P and 340 turns on coil Q.
A 4.0 V a.c. power supply is connected to coil P.
(a) (i) Explain why there is a voltage between the two terminals of coil Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain why the core of the transformer is made of soft iron.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Calculate the voltage between the two terminals of coil Q.
voltage = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
17
(ii) A heater is connected to coil Q. The current in the heater is 3.5 A. The transformer is
100% efficient.
Calculate the current in coil P.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(c) A transformer is used to step up the voltage before electrical energy is transmitted over long
distances.
State and explain one economic effect of transmitting electrical energy at a high voltage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]

PMT
18
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows equipment that is used to investigate the effect of a magnetic field on the
path of a beam of γ-rays.
thick lead plates

beam of γ-rays
γ-ray detector source of γ-rays
Fig. 11.1
A radioactive source emits γ-rays. The γ-rays pass through two small holes in thick lead
plates. Then the γ-rays pass through the shaded region and into the detector.
(i) Suggest the purpose of the two lead plates.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A magnetic field, directed into the page, is set up in the shaded region.
State and explain what happens to the reading of the detector.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) State the relative ionising effects of α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays. Suggest an explanation
for the differences.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

* 2 9 3 9 1 8 7 0 1 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SG) 133346/7
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the motion of a car.
20
speed
m/s
15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / s
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the car is 1200 kg.
(a) Calculate, for the first 20 s of the motion,
(i) the distance travelled by the car,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the acceleration of the car,
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the resultant force acting on the car.
resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Describe the motion of the car in the period of time from 25 s to 40 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17
3
2 (a) State Hooke’s Law.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) For forces up to 120 N, a spring obeys Hooke’s Law.
A force of 120 N causes an extension of 64 mm.
(i) On Fig. 2.1, draw the force-extension graph for the spring for loads up to 120 N. [1]
150
force / N
100
50
0
0 20 40 60 80
extension / mm
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Calculate the spring constant k of the spring.
k = ...........................................................[2]
(c) A student makes a spring balance using the spring in (b). The maximum reading of this
balance is 150 N.
The student tests his balance with a known weight of 140 N. He observes that the reading of
the balance is not 140 N.
Suggest and explain why the reading is not 140 N.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

4
3 All the sides of a plastic cube are 8.0 cm long. Fig. 3.1 shows the cube.
8.0 cm
The mass of the cube is 0.44 kg.
(a) Explain what is meant by mass.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Calculate the density of the plastic from which the cube is made.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The density of one type of oil is 850 kg / m3.
State and explain whether the cube floats or sinks when placed in a container of this oil.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) On the Moon, the weight of the cube is 0.70 N.
(i) Calculate the gravitational field strength on the Moon.
gravitational field strength = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

5
(ii) In a laboratory on the Moon, the plastic cube is held stationary, using a clamp, in a
beaker of the oil of density 850 kg / m3.
The arrangement is shown in Fig. 3.2.
clamp
cube
3.0 cm clamp
stand
oil
bench
Fig. 3.2
The lower face of the cube is 3.0 cm below the surface of the oil.
Use your answer to (c)(i) to calculate the pressure due to the oil on the lower face of the
cube.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a balloon filled with helium that is used to lift measuring instruments to a great
height above the Earth’s surface.
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain, in terms of momentum, how the atoms of helium produce a force on the wall of the
balloon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) At ground level, the pressure of the helium in the balloon is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The volume occupied
by the helium is 9.6 m3.
The balloon is released and it rises quickly through the atmosphere. The volume occupied by
the helium increases, but the temperature of the helium may be assumed to stay constant.
(i) Explain, in terms of the helium atoms in the balloon, why the pressure in the balloon is
smaller than at ground level.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the pressure of the helium when it occupies a volume of 12 m3.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

7
5 (a) A wave passes through a gap in a barrier. The wavelength of the wave is the same magnitude
as the width of the gap in the barrier.
Tick one box to indicate what happens to the wave.
diffraction and dispersion

diffraction only
dispersion only
refraction and diffraction
refraction and dispersion
refraction only
[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows six wavefronts of a wave travelling on the surface of deep water. The wave is
incident on a boundary with a region where the water is shallow.
boundary
direction
of wave
deep water shallow

water
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, draw the wavefronts of the wave in the shallow water where the wave travels
more slowly. [2]
(ii) The depth of the shallow water is now changed so that the speed of the wave in the
shallow water is 0.60 m / s. The speed of the wave in the deep water is 0.80 m / s.
The distance between successive wavefronts in the deep water is 1.4 cm.
Calculate the wavelength of the wave in the shallow water.
wavelength = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) The left-hand column of the table shows some possible speeds of a sound wave.
In the right-hand column, write down the medium in which a sound wave has this speed.
Choose from solid, liquid or gas.
speed of sound wave medium

m/s
1500
5000
300
[2]
(b) Fig. 6.1 represents a series of compressions and rarefactions of a sound wave.
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, mark, with the letters X and Y, the mid-points of two rarefactions. [1]
(ii) State, in terms of pressure, what is meant by a rarefaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Astronauts set up a mirror on the Moon’s surface. A laser beam is transmitted from the Earth’s
surface to the mirror and is then reflected back to Earth.
On a certain day, the time between transmitting the beam from a point on the Earth’s surface
and receiving the reflected signal at the same point is 2.56 s.
The speed of the laser beam is 3.00 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the distance between the Earth’s surface and the Moon’s surface.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and its principal axis. The points labelled F are each a
principal focus of the lens.
F F
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the top of the object O, to locate the image of O.
(b) Underline three of the terms below to describe the nature of the image produced by a
converging lens used as a magnifying glass.
[2]
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows the path of a ray of red light passing through a glass prism.
prism
air
Fig. 7.2
A ray of green light enters the prism along the same path as the ray of red light.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the path of the ray of green light as it passes through the prism and emerges
into the air. [2]
[Total: 7]

10
8 (a) Describe a renewable process by which electrical energy is obtained from the energy stored
in water. You may draw a diagram in the space.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the process described in (a) can be regarded as renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain whether the Sun is the source of the energy stored in the water in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

11
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with three 1.5 V cells.
A H
C 3.0 Ω D
B G
E F
6.0 Ω
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate
(i) the total electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cells,
e.m.f. = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the total resistance of the circuit,
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) the current in the 3.0 Ω resistor.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(b) State, using the letters in Fig. 9.1, how you would connect
(i) an ammeter to measure the total current in the circuit,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) a voltmeter to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 6.0 Ω resistor.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
12
10 (a) (i) Draw the circuit symbol for a diode.
[1]
(ii) State the function of a diode.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows the proposed system for charging the battery of an electric toothbrush.
battery
+ –
handle of
toothbrush
B
coil X
coil Y
230 V
base of
a.c.
charger
Fig. 10.1
The handle of the brush contains the battery and a coil X. The circuit from coil X to the battery
is not shown.
The base of the charger contains a coil Y, wound on an iron core, connected to the a.c. mains
supply.
To charge the battery, the handle is lowered so that coil Y is inside coil X.
Fig. 10.1 shows the direction needed for the charging current at the battery.
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

13
(i) On Fig. 10.1, complete the circuit from terminals A and B of coil X to the battery.
Include a diode. [2]
(ii) Explain how an alternating voltage is produced in coil X.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

14
11 The radioactive isotope carbon-14 (146 C) emits β-particles as it decays.
(a) The decay of carbon-14 produces an isotope of nitrogen (N).
(i) State the nature of a β-particle and state where it is produced.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Complete the nuclide equation for the radioactive decay of carbon-14.
14 C ..... .....
6 ..... N + ..... β [3]
(b) The half-life of carbon-14 is 5700 years.
Explain what is meant by the term half-life.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A workman operates a machine that uses β-particles to determine the level of liquid in a
plastic water bottle that is being filled.
Suggest why
(i) α-particles are not suitable for the same purpose,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) γ-rays are not suitable for the same purpose.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

* 7 6 6 4 1 9 6 2 9 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SG) 133347/6
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a cylinder made from copper of density 9000 kg / m3.
Fig. 1.1
The volume of the cylinder is 75 cm3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the cylinder.
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.
(i) Calculate the weight of the cylinder.
weight = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) State one way in which weight differs from mass.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows the cylinder immersed in a liquid.
liquid
2.7 cm
cylinder
The upper face of the cylinder is at a depth of 2.7 cm below the surface of the liquid.
The pressure due to the liquid at the upper face of the cylinder is 560 Pa.
(i) Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the cylinder does not float in this liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) An object is moving in a straight line at constant speed. A resultant force begins to act upon
the object.
State the ways in which the force may change the motion of the object.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) State one other effect a force could have on the object.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The mass of a car is 1400 kg. The car, initially at rest, is moved along a level road by a
resultant force of 3500 N. The car reaches a speed of 30 m / s.
(i) Calculate the average acceleration of the car.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the time for which the force is applied.
time = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) State the name of a force which opposes the motion of the car.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

5
3 (a) State the name of a fuel that is burnt to produce large amounts of electrical energy.
Describe a process by which electrical energy is obtained from the chemical energy stored in
this fuel.
Name of fuel: ............................................................................................................................
Description of process: .............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the Sun is the source of the energy stored in the fuel in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain whether the process in (a) is renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 A beaker contains water at room temperature. Fig. 4.1 shows the beaker placed on a tripod above
a Bunsen burner.
Fig. 4.1
The Bunsen burner is lit and the temperature of the water begins to increase.
(a) The water is evaporating.
(i) Describe one difference between evaporation and boiling.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the rate at which the water evaporates as its
temperature increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

7
(b) After a few minutes, the water reaches its boiling point temperature. The water continues to
gain energy from the Bunsen burner.
(i) State what happens to the temperature of the water in the beaker.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 106 J / kg. After the water reaches
its boiling point, it takes 12 minutes for 0.095 kg of water to boil away.
Calculate the average rate at which energy is being supplied to the water by heating.
rate of energy supplied = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

8
5 (a) Explain why houses in hot countries are often painted white.
Use ideas about the transfer of thermal energy in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) As a star approaches the end of its life, the amount of radiation emitted from it per second
changes.
The star cools down.

State any effect on the rate of emission of radiation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

9
6 Fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of a water wave on the surface of water approaching a gap in a
barrier.
barrier with gap
direction of travel
of wavefronts
Fig. 6.1
(a) The wavefronts to the right of the barrier spread out as far as the dashed lines in Fig. 6.1.
(i) State the name of the process of spreading out.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Draw four wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]
(b) (i) State the effect of increasing the width of the gap in the barrier.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain the effect of decreasing the frequency of the water wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 is a diagram of a converging lens used to produce an image of an object. Each point
marked F is a principal focus.
object
F F
image
Fig. 7.1
Write down three terms that describe the image produced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a plane mirror, a point object O and an observer’s eye.
mirror
O eye
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw two rays from the object reflected to the observer’s eye. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, complete your drawing to determine the position of the image of the object O.
Label this image I.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

11
8 Fig. 8.1 is a circuit diagram.
24 V
8.0 Ω 4.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
Fig. 8.1
Calculate
(a) the resistance of the circuit,
resistance = ...........................................................[4]
(b) the potential difference (p.d.) across the 8.0 Ω resistor.
p.d. = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 is a circuit diagram.
Fig. 9.1
(i) State the names of circuit components A, B and C.
component A .....................................................................................................................
component B .....................................................................................................................
component C .....................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The circuit can be used to indicate a change in temperature.
State and explain what would be observed when the temperature changes from hot
to cold.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

13
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit.
X
C
Fig. 9.2
Complete column X of the truth table for this circuit. Use the blank column for your working.
A B C X
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
[3]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a wire that carries a current into the page.
The circles on Fig. 10.1 show the pattern of the magnetic field around the wire.
Fig. 10.1
(i) On Fig. 10.1, draw an arrow on each circle to show the direction of the magnetic field. [1]
(ii) State why the spacing of the circles increases as the distance from the wire increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows an electric door lock.
The slot in the door contains an unmagnetised iron bolt attached to a spring.
The slot in the door frame is empty. This slot is surrounded by the coils of a solenoid.
In Fig. 10.2 the door is unlocked. The spring is not stretched.
door door frame
spring solenoid
unmagnetised
iron bolt
Fig. 10.2
In Fig. 10.3 the door is locked. The spring is now stretched.
Fig. 10.3
The bolt is initially in the position shown in Fig. 10.2.
Describe and explain what happens when
(i) the switch S is closed,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(ii) the switch S is reopened.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
16
11 The radioactive isotope bismuth-210 (210

83 Bi) decays by β-particle emission to an isotope of
polonium (Po).
(a) Complete the nuclide equation that represents this decay.

210 Bi ..... .....
83 ..... Po + ..... β
[3]
(b) A radiation detector is placed on a bench in a laboratory where there are no artificial sources
of radiation. The detector is switched on.
In seven one-minute periods, the detector displays these readings.
24 22 25 25 21 20 24
(i) Explain why, in the absence of any artificial source, there are readings on the detector.
Suggest one origin of this effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the readings obtained are not all the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The half-life of bismuth-210 is 5.0 days.

A sample of bismuth-210 is brought close to the detector and in one minute, the reading
displayed is 487. The equipment is left in the same place for exactly 10 days.
Predict the reading in a one-minute period at the end of this time.
reading = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

* 1 1 5 9 1 9 5 4 8 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SG) 133348/6
2
1 A truck accelerates uniformly along a straight, horizontal road. The mass of the truck is
2.0 × 104 kg.
(a) The speed of the truck increases from rest to 12 m / s in 30 s.
Calculate
(i) the distance travelled by the truck during this time,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the resultant force on the truck.
resultant force = ...........................................................[4]
(b) To maintain a uniform acceleration, the forward force on the truck must change.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a measuring cylinder that contains a coloured liquid.
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40 h
30
20
X
10
0
Fig. 2.1
The measuring cylinder contains 82 cm3 of the liquid. The density of the liquid is 950 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the liquid.
mass = ...........................................................[3]
(b) The height h of the liquid in the measuring cylinder is 0.094 m.
(i) Calculate the pressure due to the liquid at point X in Fig. 2.1.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]

4
(ii) The true pressure at point X is different from the value calculated in (b)(i).
Explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A small object is made of steel. It is placed level with the top surface of the liquid in the
measuring cylinder and then released. The object sinks in this liquid.
(i) Explain why the object sinks in this liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe how the volume of the object can now be determined.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows solar cells that use radiation from the Sun to generate electricity.
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State the name of the process which releases energy in the Sun.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A reaction takes place in the Sun as energy is released.
Describe what happens in this reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Apart from solar cells, there are other energy resources used on Earth for which the radiation
from the Sun is the source.
State the name of one of these energy resources and explain whether it is renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State two advantages and two disadvantages of using solar cells to generate electricity.
advantage 1 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
advantage 2 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage 1 .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage 2 .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 9]
6
4 (a) The molecules of most liquids are, on average, slightly further apart than the molecules of a
solid.
State one other difference between the molecular structures of a solid and a liquid.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A glass tube passes through a stopper and into a glass flask. Fig. 4.1 shows that the flask is
completely full of a liquid and that there is also some liquid in the tube.
stopper
glass tube
glass flask
liquid
Fig. 4.1
The flask is immersed in a large beaker of very hot water. At first, the level of the liquid in the
tube falls, but after a short time it rises.
(i) Explain why, at first, the level of the liquid in the tube falls.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain why the liquid level in the tube stops falling and starts to rise.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

7
5 A silver spoon has a thermal capacity of 7.2 J / °C.
(a) Explain what is meant by thermal capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The silver spoon is dropped into a saucepan of boiling water. The internal energy of the
spoon increases as its temperature increases from 22 °C to 100 °C.
(i) Calculate the increase in the internal energy of the spoon.
increase in internal energy = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) State, in terms of the atoms, what is meant by internal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The spoon is removed from the boiling water and immediately it begins to transfer energy to
the surroundings. The temperature of the surroundings is 22 °C.
On Fig. 5.1, sketch a graph to show how the temperature of the spoon changes with time
from the instant that it is removed from the water. [3]
100
temperature / °C
80
60
40
20
0
0 time
Fig. 5.1
[Total: 8]
8
6 Visible light is one component of the electromagnetic spectrum.
(a) (i) In the table, place a tick in the box next to the approximate value of the speed of light
in air. [1]
speed
m/s
3.0 × 1010
3.0 × 108
3.0 × 106
3.0 × 104
3.0 × 102
(ii) The frequency of a light wave is 4.8 × 1014 Hz.
Calculate the wavelength of this light in air.
wavelength = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Light is travelling in an optical fibre that is made of glass.
(i) The glass has a refractive index of 1.5.
1. Explain why the quantity refractive index does not have a unit.
........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Calculate the speed of light in the glass.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Describe one use of optical fibres in communication technology.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17
9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and its principal axis. The points F1 and F2 are each a
principal focus of the lens.
principal axis O
F1 F2
Fig. 7.1
An object O is placed between F1 and the lens.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the top of the object O to locate the image.
(ii) The object O is moved to the left along the principal axis so that it is further from the lens
than F1.
Fig. 7.2 is a diagram of the new arrangement with the new image shown.
F1 F2
principal axis
image
Fig. 7.2
Underline three of the terms below that describe the image shown in Fig. 7.2. [2]

10
(b) Fig. 7.3 shows yellow light passing through a glass prism.
Fig. 7.3
Blue light enters the prism along the same path as the yellow light.
On Fig. 7.3, draw the path of the blue light as it enters, passes through and leaves the prism.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

11
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows an uncharged conducting sphere on an insulating stand placed close to a
positively charged rod.
positively +
charged rod +
+
+ conducting sphere
+
+
insulating stand
Fig. 8.1
The rod and the sphere are not moved.
Describe how to charge the sphere using a wire connected to earth and explain whether the
sphere becomes positively charged or negatively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a small black circle that represents a positive charge.
On Fig. 8.2, draw the pattern and the direction of the electric field in the region around the
charge. [2]
Fig. 8.2
(c) A charge of 7.0 C flows along a wire in 5.0 minutes.
Calculate the current in the wire.
current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows the structure of an alternating current (a.c.) generator.
coil direction of
rotation
N S
slip rings
coil
voltage
output
Fig. 9.1
The coil completes one rotation every 0.020 s.
(i) Using the axes in Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to show how the voltage output of the generator
varies with time during a period of 0.040 s. [2]
voltage
output
0
0 0.020 0.040
time / s
Fig. 9.2
(ii) On your graph in Fig. 9.2, mark a point labelled A to indicate a time when the coil is
vertical. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

13
(b) There is an alternating current (a.c.) in a horizontal wire that is buried in a wall. A builder must
miss this wire when drilling a hole in the wall.
The builder places an instrument against the wall that registers a reading when it is close to
the wire. The instrument includes a long coil (solenoid) S that has an iron core and a sensitive
voltmeter. Fig. 9.3 shows the circuit of the instrument close to the wire.
surface of wall
end view of wire
X
S V
alternating current
in wire
iron core
Fig. 9.3
(i) Explain why there is a reading on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) State the name and the effect of the component labelled X in Fig. 9.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) State the nature of γ-rays.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A nucleus of technetium-99 (99

43Tc) emits only a γ-ray.
State any effect of this on
(i) the proton number of the nucleus,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the nucleon number of the nucleus.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) In a laboratory a radiation detector displays a count rate of 16 counts / minute due to
background radiation.
(i) State what is meant by background radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A sample of a radioactive isotope is placed near to the radiation detector and a count
rate of 112 counts / minute is recorded.
After 18 hours, the count rate recorded is 28 counts / minute.
Determine the half-life of this isotope.
half-life = ...........................................................[3]
(d) Radioactive isotopes are stored in thick lead containers.
State two precautions to be taken when radioactive isotopes are used.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

* 7 0 3 2 6 3 3 3 7 5 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SG) 107601/3
2
1 A driving instructor gives a student a sudden order to stop the car in the shortest possible time.
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of the motion of the car from the moment the order is given.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) The order to stop is given at time t = 0 s.
(i) State the speed of the car at t = 0 s.
speed = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why the car continues to travel at this speed for 0.9 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the deceleration of the car between t = 0.9 s and t = 4.0 s,
deceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the total distance travelled by the car from t = 0 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

3
(c) Describe and explain a danger to a driver of not wearing a safety belt during a sudden stop.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a hammer being used to drive a nail into a piece of wood.
hammer head
nail
wood
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the hammer head is 0.15 kg.

The speed of the hammer head when it hits the nail is 8.0 m / s.
The time for which the hammer head is in contact with the nail is 0.0015 s.
The hammer head stops after hitting the nail.
(a) Calculate the change in momentum of the hammer head.
change in momentum = ...........................................................[2]
(b) State the impulse given to the nail.
impulse = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the average force between the hammer and the nail.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

5
3 (a) (i) On Fig. 3.1, draw a graph of extension against load for a spring which obeys Hooke’s law.
[1]
extension
0
0 load
Fig. 3.1
(ii) State the word used to describe the energy stored in a spring that has been stretched or
compressed.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows a model train, travelling at speed v, approaching a buffer.
model train
buffer
spring
Fig. 3.2
The train, of mass 2.5 kg, is stopped by compressing a spring in the buffer. After the train has
stopped, the energy stored in the spring is 0.48 J.
Calculate the initial speed v of the train.
v = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 6]

6
4 (a) The source of solar energy is the Sun.
Tick the box next to those resources for which the Sun is also the source of energy.
coal
geothermal
hydroelectric
nuclear
wind [2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a solar water-heating panel on the roof of a house.
copper tubes,
painted black
roof
Fig. 4.1
Cold water flows into the copper tubes, which are heated by solar radiation. Hot water flows
out of the tubes and is stored in a tank.
(i) Explain why the tubes are made of copper and are painted black.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) In 5.0 s, 0.019 kg of water flows through the tubes. The temperature of the water increases
from 20 °C to 72 °C. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the thermal energy gained by the water in 5.0 s.
thermal energy = ...........................................................[3]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

7
(iii) The efficiency of the solar panel is 70%.
Calculate the power of the solar radiation incident on the panel.
power = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

8
5 (a) A student carries out an experiment to find the relationship between the pressure p and the
volume V of a fixed mass of gas. The table contains four of her sets of measurements.
p / kPa 250 500 750 1000
V / cm3 30.0 15.2 9.8 7.6
(i) Use the data in the table to suggest the relationship between the pressure and the
volume in this experiment. Explain how you reach your conclusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State the property of the gas, apart from the mass, that remains constant during the
experiment.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A lake is 5.0 m deep. The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the pressure at the bottom of the lake due to this depth of water.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) A bubble of gas escapes from the mud at the bottom of the lake and rises to the surface.
Place one tick in each row of the table to indicate what happens to the volume, the mass
and the density of the gas in the bubble. Assume that no gas or water vapour enters or
leaves the bubble.
increases stays the same decreases
volume of bubble
mass of gas in bubble
density of gas in bubble

[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

9
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 represents the waveform of a sound wave. The wave is travelling at constant speed.
displacement
of particles
distance
along wave
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1,
1. label with the letter X the marked distance corresponding to the amplitude of the
wave, [1]
2. label with the letter Y the marked distance corresponding to the wavelength of the
wave. [1]
(ii) State what happens to the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave if
1. the loudness of the sound is increased at constant pitch,
amplitude ...................................................................................................................
wavelength .................................................................................................................
[1]
2. the pitch of the sound is increased at constant loudness.
amplitude ...................................................................................................................
wavelength .................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) A ship uses pulses of sound to measure the depth of the sea beneath the ship. A sound pulse
is transmitted into the sea and the echo from the sea-bed is received after 54 ms. The speed
of sound in seawater is 1500 m / s.
Calculate the depth of the sea beneath the ship.
depth = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
10
7 (a) Explain what is meant by
(i) total internal reflection,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) critical angle.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light, travelling in air, incident on a glass prism.
60°
30°
Fig. 7.1
(i) The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s. Its speed in the glass is 2.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

11
(ii) Show that the critical angle for the glass-air boundary is 42°.
[1]
(iii) On Fig. 7.1, draw carefully, without calculation, the continuation of the ray through the
prism and into the air. [3]
[Total: 8]

12
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows 3 lamps and a fuse connected to a power supply.
220 V
Fig. 8.1
The e.m.f. of the supply is 220 V. Each lamp is labelled 220 V, 40 W. The rating of the fuse is
2.0 A.
Calculate
(i) the current in each lamp,
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the current in the fuse,
current = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the total number of lamps, all in parallel, that could be connected without blowing the
fuse.
number = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

13
(b) After a very long period of use, the wire filament of one of the lamps becomes thinner.
(i) Underline the effect of this change on the resistance of the filament.
resistance increases resistance remains the same resistance decreases [1]
(ii) State and explain the effect of this change on the power of the lamp.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

14
9 (a) (i) State what is meant by the direction of an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Fig. 9.1 shows a pair of oppositely-charged horizontal metal plates with the top plate
positive.
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
Fig. 9.1
The electric field between the plates in Fig. 9.1 is uniform.
Draw lines on Fig. 9.1 to represent this uniform field. Add arrows to these lines to show
the direction of the field. [3]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a very small negatively-charged oil drop in the air between a pair of oppositely
charged horizontal metal plates. The oil drop does not move up or down.
oil drop
–
Fig. 9.2
(i) Suggest, in terms of forces, why the oil drop does not move up or down.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Without losing any of its charge, the oil drop begins to evaporate.
State and explain what happens to the oil drop.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

15
131
10 (a) An iodine isotope 53 I decays by β-emission to an isotope of xenon (Xe).
131
(i) State the number of each type of particle in a neutral atom of 53 I.
protons ......................... neutrons ......................... electrons ......................... [2]
(ii) State the symbol, in nuclide notation, for the xenon nucleus.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The background count rate of radioactivity in a laboratory is 30 counts / min.
A radioactive sample has a half-life of 50 minutes. The sample is placed at a fixed distance
from a detector. The detector measures an initial count rate from the sample, including
background, of 310 counts / min.
On Fig. 10.1, plot suitable points and draw a graph of the count rate from the sample,
corrected for background, as it changes with time.
300
corrected
count rate
counts / min
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
time / min
Fig. 10.1
[3]
[Total: 7]

16
11 (a) (i) Fig. 11.1 shows the symbol for a logic gate and its truth table.
input A input B output

A 0 0 0
output 1 0 0
B 0 1 0
1 1 1
Fig. 11.1
State the name of this logic gate. ............................................................[1]
(ii) Complete the truth table for the logic gate shown in Fig. 11.2.
input A input B output

A 0 0
output 1 0
B 0 1
1 1
Fig. 11.2
[2]
(b) Fig. 11.3 shows the system of logic gates used to ensure the security of the strongroom of a
bank.
A
B D
C
E
Fig. 11.3
The strongroom door will only open when the output F is logic 1.
Complete the table to show the logic states at A, B, C, D and E when the strongroom door
can be opened.
input A input B input C output D output E output F
1
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

PHYSICS 0625/41
*9332191914*

1 hour 15 minutes


2
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s ).
06_0625_41_2016_1.10
2
1 (a) A bus travels at a constant speed. It stops for a short time and then travels at a higher constant
speed.
Using the axes in Fig. 1.1, draw a distance-time graph for this bus journey.
distance
0
0 time
Fig. 1.1
[3]
(b) A lift (elevator) starts from rest at the ground floor of a building.
Fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for the motion of the lift to the top floor of the building.
4.0
speed
m/s
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time / s
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

3
Use the graph to determine the distance from the ground floor to the top floor of the building.
distance = ................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a dummy of mass 70 kg used in a crash test to investigate the safety of a new car.
passenger dummy
barrier compartment
windscreen
Fig. 2.1
The car approaches a solid barrier at 20 m / s. It crashes into the barrier and stops suddenly.
(a) (i) Calculate the momentum of the dummy immediately before the crash.
momentum = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) Determine the impulse that must be applied to the dummy to bring it to rest.
impulse = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

5
(b) In the crash test, the passenger compartment comes to rest in 0.20 s.
Calculate the deceleration of the passenger compartment.
deceleration = ................................................................. [2]
(c) The seat belt and air bag bring the dummy to rest so that it does not hit the windscreen.
2
The dummy has an average deceleration of 80 m / s .
Calculate the average resultant force applied to the dummy, of mass 70 kg.
force = ................................................................. [2]
(d) The deceleration of the dummy is less than the deceleration of the passenger compartment.
Explain why this is of benefit for the safety of a passenger.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an oil tank that has a rectangular base of dimensions 2.4 m by 1.5 m.
oil
depth of oil
1.5 m
1.5 m
2.4 m
Fig. 3.1
3
The tank is filled with oil of density 850 kg / m to a depth of 1.5 m.
(a) Calculate
(i) the pressure exerted by the oil on the base of the tank,
pressure = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) the force exerted by the oil on the base of the tank.
force = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

7
(b) The force calculated in (a)(ii) is the weight of the oil.
Calculate the mass of oil in the tank.
mass = ................................................................. [1]
(c) When he is checking the level of oil in the tank, a man drops a brass key into the oil and it
sinks to the bottom of the oil.
(i) State what this shows about the density of brass.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain how attaching the key to a piece of wood could prevent the key from sinking.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

8
4 (a) Explain, in terms of molecules, why it is possible to compress a gas, but not a liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two containers made of insulating material contain the same volume of water at room
temperature. The containers do not have lids. The volume of liquid in each container gradually
decreases.
(i) After a certain time, the temperature of the water has decreased to below room
temperature.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why the temperature has decreased.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) One of the containers is wide and shallow. The other container is narrow and deep.
Predict which container has the greater rate of cooling. Explain your answer.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

9
5 (a) State what happens to the molecules of a gas in a sealed container when the temperature of
the gas is increased.
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A quantity of gas is contained in a sealed container of fixed volume. The temperature of the
gas is increased.
State, in terms of molecules, two reasons why the pressure of the gas increases.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
[2]
3
(c) A helium-filled weather balloon is held at ground level. The volume of the balloon is 4800 m .
The pressure of the helium is 98 kPa.
3
The balloon is released and rises to a height where the volume of the balloon is 7200 m .
(i) Calculate the new pressure of the helium. Assume that the temperature stays constant.
pressure = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) Suggest why it may be necessary to release helium from the balloon as it rises even
higher.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

10
6 (a) Two students are measuring the speed of sound.
The students are provided with a starting pistol, a stopwatch and a long measuring tape. The
starting pistol, when fired, produces a loud sound and a puff of smoke at the same instant.
Describe how the students use the apparatus and how they calculate the speed. You may
draw a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

11
(b) A device at the bottom of the sea emits a sound wave of frequency 200 Hz.
(i) The speed of sound in sea-water is 1500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the sound in sea-water.
wavelength = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) The sound wave passes from the sea-water into the air.
State what happens, if anything, to
• the frequency of the sound, ...............................................................................
................................................................................................................................
• the speed of the sound. .....................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

12
7 (a) (i) A ray of light passes through a length of curved optical fibre.
Draw a diagram showing the fibre and the path of the ray of light.
[1]
(ii) Describe one use of optical fibres in medicine. You may draw a diagram.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

13
(b) Draw a straight line from each wave on the left to the most appropriate speed.
90 m / s
(9 × 10)
6000 m / s
light in air (6 × 103)
100 000 m / s
(1 × 105)
microwaves in
a vacuum
1 000 000 m / s
(1 × 106)
300 000 000 m / s

sound in steel
(3 × 108)
60 000 000 000 m / s

(6 × 1010)
[3]
(c) The refractive index of a block of glass is 1.5.
Use your value for the speed of light from (b) to calculate the speed of light in this block.
speed = ................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

14
8 (a) Two straight, vertical wires X and Y pass through holes in a horizontal card.
Fig. 8.1 shows the card viewed from above.
card
wire X Y wire
in hole in hole
Fig. 8.1
There is a current in each wire in a downward direction (into the page).
(i) The magnetic field at Y due to the current in X produces a force on Y.
Place a tick in each blank column of the table to indicate the direction of this magnetic
field and the direction of the force.
magnetic field force

at Y on Y
towards the top of the page
towards the bottom of the page
to the left
to the right
into the page
out of the page
[2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

15
(ii) State and explain whether there is also a force on wire X.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a d.c. supply connected to the input of a transformer.
iron core
d.c. supply galvanometer
Fig. 8.2
When switch S is first closed, the needle of the galvanometer deflects briefly, then returns to
zero.
Explain why the brief deflection occurs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

16
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a 12 V battery connected in a circuit containing resistors A, B, C and D. Each resistor
has a resistance of 6.0 Ω.
12 V
A B
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of
(i) resistors A and B,
resistance = ................................................................. [1]

(ii) resistors A, B and C,
resistance = ................................................................. [2]

(iii) resistors A, B, C and D.
resistance = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

17
(b) Calculate
(i) the current in the battery,
current = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) the energy transferred from the battery to the circuit in 50 s.
energy transferred = ................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

18
10 (a) (i) Fig. 10.1 shows the symbol for a circuit component.
Fig. 10.1
Name this component.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOT gate.
[1]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a digital circuit.
A C
B
E
D
Fig. 10.2
Complete the truth table for this circuit.
input A input B output C input D output E
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

19
(c) Suggest a modification to the circuit in Fig. 10.2 to produce the output Z in the truth table below.
It may help you to compare this truth table with the truth table in (b).
input A input B input D output Z
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

20
11 Bismuth-214 is radioactive. It has a half-life of 20 minutes.
(a) The nuclide notation for bismuth-214 is Bi.
State the composition of the nucleus of bismuth-214.
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Bismuth-214 decays by β-decay to an isotope of polonium, Po.
Complete the equation for the decay of bismuth-214.
214
83Bi
→ ...........
...........
β + ...........
...........
Po
[3]
(c) The count rate from a sample of bismuth-214 is 360 counts / s.
Predict the count rate from the sample after 60 minutes.
count rate = ................................................................. [2]
(d) State two of the social, economic or environmental issues involved in the storage of radioactive
materials with very long half-lives.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

PHYSICS 0625/42
*6573684646*

1 hour 15 minutes

2
06_0625_42_2016_1.11
2
1 (a) An object is moving in a straight line at constant speed. A force is applied to the object.
State the possible changes in the motion of the object.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a skier taking part in a speed competition. The winner of the competition has
the highest average speed over the 100 m section shown in Fig. 1.1.
start
skier
100 m
Fig. 1.1
(i) The skier starts from rest and has a constant acceleration. He reaches a speed of
60 m / s in 16 s.
Calculate the skier’s acceleration.
acceleration = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

3
(ii) Over the length of the 100 m section, the time recorded is 1.85 s.
Calculate the skier’s average speed over the section.
average speed = ................................................................. [2]
(iii) Suggest why the skier bends his body, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Explain your answer.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows two railway trucks on a track.
5.0 m / s
buffer truck B truck A

5000 kg 6000 kg track
Fig. 2.1
Truck A of mass 6000 kg is moving at 5.0 m / s. It is approaching truck B of mass 5000 kg, which is
stationary.
(a) Calculate the momentum of truck A.
momentum = ................................................................. [2]
(b) The trucks collide, their buffers compress and then they bounce off each other, remaining
undamaged.
After the collision, truck B has a momentum of 27 000 kg m / s.
(i) Determine the impulse applied to truck B.
impulse = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) The trucks are in contact for 0.60 s.
Calculate the average force on truck B.
force = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

5
(iii) Calculate the final speed of truck A.
speed = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a cabin used to transport passengers up a hillside.
NOT TO
SCALE C
drive pulley
connected to
electric motor
pulley 50 m
cable
pulley A B
pulley
cabin
support cabin
Fig. 3.1
The cabin is attached to a cable which moves horizontally from A to B, then up the hill from B to C.
(a) There is an electrical input of energy to the motor which moves the cable.
Place two ticks against types of energy that increase as the cabin moves horizontally at
constant speed from A to B.
kinetic energy of the cabin
gravitational potential energy of the cabin
gravitational potential energy of the cable
internal energy of the surroundings
internal energy of the wires of the motor

[2]
(b) The cabin and passengers have a total mass of 800 kg. The vertical distance between
B and C is 50 m.
Calculate the increase of gravitational potential energy of the cabin and passengers when they
move from B to C.
energy = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

7
(c) The cabin then descends back from C to B.
The weight of the cabin pulls the cable, which rotates the motor. The electric motor acts as a
generator when rotated in this way.
Explain the environmental and economic benefits of this arrangement.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

8
4 An archaeologist is investigating a shipwreck and discovers a wooden box on the seabed.
surface of sea
NOT TO
SCALE
15 m
lid
wooden box
0.80 m
1.2 m
Fig. 4.1
The dimensions of the lid of the box are 1.2 m by 0.80 m and the pressure of the atmosphere
5
is 1.0 × 10 Pa. The lid is 15 m below the surface of the sea.
3
(a) The density of sea-water is 1020 kg / m .
Calculate
(i) the pressure on the lid of the box due to the sea-water,
pressure = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) the total pressure on the lid,
pressure = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

9
(iii) the downward force that the total pressure produces on the lid.
force = ................................................................. [2]
(b) The force needed to open the lid is not equal to the value calculated in (a)(iii).
Suggest two reasons for this.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

10
5 Two pans containing water are placed on the hotplates of an electric cooker, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
large pan
small pan
hotplates
Fig. 5.1
The hotplates are switched on and the temperature of the water in the pans starts to increase.
When the temperature of the water is below 100 °C, some water is evaporating. At 100 °C, the
water starts to boil and its temperature remains constant.
(a) State and explain which pan has the greater rate of evaporation of water when both pans of
water are at the same temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Apart from the temperature at which it occurs, state how boiling differs from evaporation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) When the water is boiling, thermal energy is being supplied to the water at a rate of 920 W.
(i) Explain the effect on the molecules of the thermal energy supplied.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

11
6
(ii) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 10 J / kg.
Calculate the mass of water that boils away in 5.0 minutes.
mass = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

12
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a protractor superimposed on the path of a ray of light. The light is travelling in
glass towards the boundary with air.
air
180 170 1
170 180
0
10 0
glass
10
20
60
160
20
15
3 0
0
0
30
15
14
40
0
0 13
40
4
1 50 01
0 60 20 50
0 13 110
80 7 20 00 1 60
1 90 70
10
100 1 80
incident ray
Fig. 6.1
(i) Use the protractor to measure the angle of incidence of the ray of light at the boundary
with the air.
angle of incidence = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) The refractive index of the glass is 1.56.
Calculate the angle of refraction in the air.
angle of refraction = ................................................................. [3]
(b) (i) State what is meant by critical angle.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

13
(ii) Calculate the critical angle of light in glass of refractive index 1.56.
critical angle = ................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows a water wave crossing a boundary from shallow water to deep water.
new wave
direction
original
wave
direction
deep
water
shallow
water
Fig. 6.2
(i) Name the process that takes place at the boundary between the shallow water and the
deep water.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Tick one box corresponding to the property of the wave that is the same in the shallow
water as in the deep water.
amplitude
frequency
speed
wavelength
[1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

14
7 (a) Describe the use of X-rays in a security application. Include a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

15
(b) Draw a straight line from each wave to the most appropriate speed.
300 m / s
(3 × 102)
radio waves 6000 m / s

in air (6 × 103)
1 000 000 m / s
(1 × 106)
ultrasound
in air
300 000 000 m / s
(3 × 108)
X-rays in 60 000 000 000 m / s

a vacuum (6 × 1010)
1 000 000 000 000 m / s

(1 × 1012)
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

16
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a coil wound around a steel bar that is initially unmagnetised.
Any appropriate power supply can be connected between the terminals A and B. No other
apparatus is available.
steel bar
A B
Fig. 8.1
Describe
• how the steel bar can be magnetised,

• how the steel bar can then be demagnetised.
magnetised: ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
demagnetised: ..................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

17
240 V
P S lamp
mains
Fig. 8.2
A 240 V mains supply is connected to the primary coil P. The voltage across the secondary
coil S is 12 V. A lamp, in series with a 3.0 A fuse, is connected to S.
The number of turns in the coils of the transformer is not shown accurately in Fig. 8.2.
Predict, with a suitable calculation, whether the fuse blows when there is a current of 0.20 A
in the primary coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a conducting ball that oscillates between two charged plates.
clamp
insulating
thread
positive plate
negative plate
ball
+ –
very high sensitive

voltage supply ammeter
Fig. 9.1
The ball repeatedly strikes each plate in turn.
(a) Explain, in terms of the charge on the ball, why the ball moves to the positive plate after striking
the negative plate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State which particles move through the sensitive ammeter and the direction in which they
move.
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

19
-10
(c) For each complete oscillation of the ball moving between the plates, a charge of 8.5 × 10 C
is transferred from one plate to the other. The frequency of oscillation is 4.0 Hz.
Calculate the current shown on the sensitive ammeter.
current = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

20
10 Fig. 10.1 shows part of the circuit of a hair-dryer with a 240 V a.c. supply.
240 V
A
X
B
C
Y Z
Fig. 10.1
The switch can be in one of three positions:
• position A: off (as shown),

• position B: low heater power,
• position C: high heater power.
All three heaters X, Y and Z each have a power of 1000 W when used in this hair-dryer.
Heaters Y and Z have equal resistances.
Calculate
(a) the resistance of heater X,
resistance = ................................................................. [2]
(b) the resistance of heater Y,
resistance = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

21
(c) the current in heater Z when the switch is in position C.
current = ................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

22
11 Radon-220 is a radioactive isotope.
(a) The nuclide notation for radon-220 is Rn.
Describe the composition of a neutral atom of radon-220.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A nucleus of radon-220 decays to an isotope of polonium (Po) by emitting an alpha particle.
Complete the nuclide equation for the decay of radon-220.
220
86Rn
→ ...........
...........
α + ...........
...........
Po
[3]
(c) A detector of radiation is placed near a sample of radon-220 and gives a reading of
720 counts / s. The half-life of radon-220 is 55 s.
Calculate the reading after 220 s. Ignore background radiation.
reading = ................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

24
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

PHYSICS 0625/43
*8543501407*

1 hour 15 minutes

2
06_0625_43_2016_1.8
2
1 (a) State why force is a vector quantity.
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A 20 N force and a 15 N force act at the same time on an object of mass 14 kg.
Calculate
(i) the maximum possible force on the object due to these two forces,
force = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) the acceleration caused by a resultant force equal to this maximum force.
acceleration = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

3
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows a river in which the velocity of the flowing water is 0.85 m / s parallel to the river
banks.
river bank
velocity of swimmer
velocity relative to water
of water NOT TO
45° 1.2 m / s
SCALE
0.85 m / s
Fig. 1.1
A swimmer sets off from one bank. The velocity of the swimmer relative to the water is 1.2 m / s
at 45° to the river banks, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
In the space below, draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant velocity of the swimmer
relative to the river banks. This velocity is the resultant of the two velocities shown on Fig. 1.1.
Label this resultant on your diagram.
resultant velocity = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows two cars, A and B, before they collide.
18 m / s
stationary
car B car A
Fig. 2.1
Car B, of mass 1200 kg, is stationary. Car A, of mass 2000 kg, is travelling towards car B at 18 m / s.
(a) Calculate the momentum of car A.
momentum = ................................................................. [2]
(b) The cars collide and car B experiences an impulse. Car A continues to move in the same
direction, with a momentum of 21 000 kg m / s.
(i) Calculate the momentum of car B immediately after the collision.
momentum = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) Determine the average impulse experienced by car B during the collision.
impulse = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

5
(iii) The cars are in contact for 0.20 s.
Calculate the average resultant force experienced by car B during the collision.
force = ................................................................. [2]
(c) A modern car is designed so that, during a collision, the front section of the car is crushed and
the time of contact increases.
Explain the benefit of increasing the time of contact for the people in the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

6
3 A test-tube containing solid wax is heated by placing it in a beaker of very hot water for several
minutes. The solid wax becomes a liquid.
(a) State, in terms of molecules, how a solid differs from a liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, why thermal energy must be supplied for a solid to become a
liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The test-tube is removed from the hot water and held in a clamp stand.
Fig. 3.1 shows the test-tube and liquid wax cooling in air.
thermometer
stopwatch
liquid
wax
hot water
Fig. 3.1
As the wax cools, its temperature is recorded at regular time intervals.
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

7
Fig. 3.2 is the temperature-time graph for the wax.
100
temperature / °C
80
60
40
20
0 4 8 12 16 20
time / min
Fig. 3.2
(i) Using Fig. 3.2, determine the melting point of the wax.
melting point = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) The specific latent heat of fusion of the wax is 210 J / g. The test-tube contains 50 g of
wax.
Using Fig. 3.2, determine the rate at which the wax is losing internal energy as the wax
solidifies. Give your answer in J / min.
rate of loss of energy = ....................................................... J / min [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

8
4 In an industrial process, a gas that is already at high pressure is trapped in a large cylinder by a
piston.
Fig. 4.1 shows the gas, the cylinder and the piston.
high-pressure gas
piston
cylinder
Fig. 4.1
The piston is pushed into the cylinder. As the pressure of the gas changes, its temperature remains
constant.
(a) Fig. 4.2 shows how the pressure of the trapped gas depends on its volume.
20
pressure / MPa
15
10
0
0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40
volume / m3
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

9
(i) Describe the relationship shown by the graph between the pressure of the gas and the
volume it occupies. Explain this relationship in terms of the molecules.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) Determine the volume occupied by the gas when it is released into the atmosphere at
a pressure of 0.10 MPa. You will need to use data from Fig. 4.2.
volume = ....................................................... [2]
(b) An unused cylinder of the compressed gas is moved into a cold warehouse. The temperature
of the gas decreases.
State how the decrease in the temperature affects
(i) the motion of the gas molecules,
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the pressure of the gas in the cylinder.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

10
5 (a) Radio waves, ultrasound and visible light are all waves.
(i) State what is meant by ultrasound and suggest a value for the minimum possible
frequency of ultrasound waves.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State which of these waves are
• electromagnetic,
................................................................................................................................
• longitudinal.
................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

11
(b) Ultrasound passes through both human flesh and bone.
Fig. 5.1 shows an ultrasound source sending an ultrasound wave into human flesh.
flesh bone flesh
X Y
ultrasound
source
thickness t
Fig. 5.1
The ultrasound wave travels through the flesh to point X and then through the thickness of the
bone to point Y. At Y, some ultrasound is reflected and returns to X.
–6
The total time taken for ultrasound to travel in the bone from X to Y and back to X is 9.0 × 10 s.
The speed of ultrasound in bone is 4100 m / s.
Calculate the thickness t of the bone.
thickness t = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

12
6 (a) A block is made from a particular type of glass.
Fig. 6.1 shows light passing from air into the glass block.
29° air
glass
33° NOT TO
SCALE
Fig. 6.1
Using information from Fig. 6.1, calculate
(i) the refractive index of light in this type of glass,
refractive index = ................................................................. [3]
(ii) the critical angle for light travelling in this type of glass.
critical angle = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

13
(b) State one application of optical fibres. Draw a diagram that shows how an optical fibre is used
in this application.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

14
7 A lightning conductor protects a tall building and the people in it against damage and injury caused
by lightning strikes.
The lightning conductor is a very long strip of copper that is attached to the side of the building. At
the top of the building, the strip of copper is connected to a vertical metal pole and at the bottom
of the building, it is buried in the ground.
Fig. 7.1 shows a thundercloud passing over the building.
thundercloud
– – – – – –
metal pole
building
lightning
conductor
ground
Fig. 7.1
The bottom of the thundercloud is negatively charged.
As the cloud moves closer to the building, the top of the metal pole becomes charged.
(a) State the sign of the charge at the top of the metal pole. Explain, in terms of the particles
involved, how it becomes charged.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

15
(b) As the cloud passes over the building, a lightning strike occurs and a charge of 0.84 C flows
–5
through the lightning conductor. The charge flows for 3.5 × 10 s.
(i) Calculate the average current in the lightning conductor during this time.
current = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) It is suggested that the current in the lightning conductor could be measured by
connecting a laboratory ammeter between the pole and the copper strip.
State one reason why this cannot be successful.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) The copper strip has a large cross-sectional area.
State how increasing the cross-sectional area of the copper strip affects its resistance.
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

16
8 (a) (i) In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
[1]
(ii) Complete the truth table for a NOR gate.
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[2]
(b) The fuel for an engine needs to be warm in order for the engine to work. If the temperature
of the fuel is below the working temperature TW, an LED emits light.
Fig. 8.1 is the diagram of the circuit that includes the LED.
Fig. 8.1
Component Y is in thermal contact with the fuel.
(i) State the name of component X and the name of component Y.
X ............................................................................................................................
Y ............................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

17
(ii) The fuel is too cold and the LED is emitting light.
State and explain what happens in the circuit as the temperature of the fuel increases
to a value above TW.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
(c) In Fig. 8.2, the LED is now in parallel with component X instead of with component Y.
Fig. 8.2
The temperature of component Y increases from a value below TW to a value above TW.
Predict what happens in this circuit. Suggest a use for the circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

18
9 The two ends of a metal rod are connected by copper wire to a very sensitive ammeter. The rod is
placed horizontally in the horizontal magnetic field between the N-pole and S-pole of a permanent
magnet, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
horizontal
metal rod
vertical N
movement
S
N A
sensitive
ammeter
magnet S
magnet
Fig. 9.1
(a) The rod is moved upwards at constant speed in the direction shown by the arrow in Fig. 9.1.
An e.m.f. is induced in the rod.
(i) State two factors that determine the size of the induced e.m.f.
1. ............................................................................................................................
2. ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The size of the current in the ammeter depends on the size of the induced e.m.f.
State one other factor that affects the size of the current.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

19
(iii) The direction of motion of the rod is now changed . It moves at a constant speed towards
the N-pole, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
horizontal
movement
N
S
N A
Fig. 9.2
State and explain what happens to the induced e.m.f.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

20
(b) Fig. 9.3 shows a rectangular coil of wire placed in the same horizontal magnetic field.
N rotation
rectangular coil
N S
Fig. 9.3
The coil rotates in the direction shown by the arrow in Fig. 9.3. An e.m.f. is induced in the coil.
(i) On Fig. 9.4, sketch a graph to show how the e.m.f. varies with time for two complete
revolutions of the coil.
e.m.f.
0
0 time
Fig. 9.4
[2]
(ii) On your sketch in Fig. 9.4, mark a letter T to indicate a time when the coil is horizontal,
as shown in Fig. 9.3.
[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

21
10 A sample contains atoms of a particular isotope of protactinium .
(a) A nucleus of this protactinium isotope contains 91 protons and 143 neutrons.
(i) State the values of X and Y in the symbol .
X = .................................................................
Y = .................................................................
[2]
(ii) This isotope is radioactive and it decays by the emission of a β-particle, β, to an

isotope of uranium, U.
Complete the equation for the decay of a protactinium nucleus.
............. .............
–1 β
0
............. Pa + ............. U
[2]
(b) A radiation detector measures a background count rate in a laboratory of 32 counts / minute.
(i) Suggest two naturally occurring sources of background radiation.
1. ............................................................................................................................
2. ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The sample is placed in the laboratory close to the radiation detector, and the count
rate increases to 544 counts / minute.
This isotope of protactinium has a half-life of 400 minutes.
Predict a value for the count rate measured 1200 minutes later.
count rate = ....................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

22
(iii) Suggest one reason why the count rate measured 1200 minutes later may differ slightly
from the value predicted in (b)(ii).
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

* 5 2 5 4 5 2 0 8 1 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/FD) 116034/8
2
1 An astronaut on the Moon drops a feather from rest, off the top of a small cliff. The acceleration
due to gravity on the Moon is 1.6 m / s2. There is no air on the Moon.
(a) The feather falls for 4.5 s before it hits the ground.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the falling feather. [2]
speed
m/s
6
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Determine the distance fallen by the feather.
distance = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

3
(b) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the shape of a speed-time graph for the same feather falling on Earth.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
[2]
(c) Explain the difference between speed and velocity. Include the words vector and scalar in
your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 represents the cross-section of an oil tanker in a river.
tanker
15 m river
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) The bottom of the tanker is 15 m below the surface of the water. The area of the bottom of the
tanker is 6000 m2. The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the pressure due to the water at the depth of 15 m.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the force due to the water pressure on the bottom of the tanker.
force = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) Deduce the weight of the tanker.
weight = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

5
(b) The tanker sails out onto a calm sea. The density of sea-water is greater than the density of
river water.
State and explain any change in the depth of the bottom of the tanker below the surface.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

6
3 (a) A closed container holds a quantity of gas.
Explain, in terms of momentum, how molecules of the gas exert a force on a wall of the
container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a glass tube containing mercury.
mercury
air h
Fig. 3.1
The mercury traps a fixed mass of air in the left-hand arm of the tube. The right-hand arm of
the tube is open to the atmosphere. The difference in mercury levels in the two arms is h.
(i) The pressure of the atmosphere on the surface of the mercury in the right-hand arm of
the tube is 760 mm Hg. The distance h is 120 mm.
Calculate the total pressure at level Q, in mm of mercury (mm Hg), due to the atmosphere
and the mercury above Q.
pressure = .............................................. mm Hg [1]
(ii) State the pressure exerted by the air in the left-hand arm of the tube.
pressure = .............................................. mm Hg [1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

7
(iii) Initially, the volume of air trapped in the left-hand arm of the tube is 12 cm3.
More mercury is poured into the right-hand arm of the tube. The volume of the trapped
air decreases. The temperature does not change. The difference in levels, h, becomes
240 mm.
Calculate the new volume of the trapped air.
volume = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

8
4 (a) In an experiment, cold water is poured into a bowl made of an insulating material. The container
is placed in a draught-free room. After several hours, the volume and the temperature of the
water are found to have decreased.
Name and describe the process that causes the decrease in the volume of the water, and
explain why the temperature of the water decreases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) In a second experiment, using the same apparatus and the same initial amount of cold water
as in (a), an electric fan blows air over the top of the bowl.
Predict and explain how the results of this experiment compare with the results of the
experiment in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) In a third experiment, the same initial amount of cold water as in (a) is poured into a metal
bowl. The metal bowl is the same shape and size as the bowl used in (a).
Compared with the experiment in (a), the decrease in temperature is less in the same time.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

9
5 (a) Compare the arrangement and motion of the molecules in ice and in liquid water.
ice .............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
water .........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An ice-hockey rink has an area of 1800 m2. The ice has a thickness of 0.025 m. The density of
ice is 920 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the mass of ice on the rink.
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The ice is at 0 °C. To form the ice, water at 0 °C was poured onto the floor of the rink and
then frozen. The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate the energy removed from the water to form the ice at 0 °C.
energy = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

10
6 (a) (i) State a typical value for the speed of sound in air.
speed = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) State the range of frequencies that can be heard by a healthy human ear.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A sound wave in air has a wavelength of 22 mm.
Fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of this sound. These wavefronts are successive compressions.
22 mm
Fig. 6.1
(i) Using your value for the speed of sound in (a)(i), calculate the frequency of the sound
wave.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, draw dotted lines to represent three different rarefactions. [1]
(iii) State, in terms of both molecules and pressure, what is meant by a rarefaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

11
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a box ABCD.
A B
prism 1
ray of light
box
emergent ray
D C
Fig. 7.1
The box contains two identical glass prisms, one of which is shown. Light incident on prism 1
undergoes total internal reflection within the glass.
(a) (i) On Fig. 7.1, complete the path of the ray of light through prism 1. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, draw a second prism inside the dashed square, positioned so that the light
reflects inside the glass and emerges from the box as shown. Complete the path of the
ray. [2]
(b) Select the statements that correctly describe the necessary conditions for the light to undergo
total internal reflection. Tick two boxes.
The angle of incidence in the glass is less than the critical angle of light in the glass.
The angle of incidence in the glass is greater than the critical angle of light in the
glass.
The angle of reflection in the glass is equal to the angle of refraction.
The speed of light in the glass is greater than the speed of light in air.
The speed of light in the glass is equal to the speed of light in air.
The speed of light in the glass is less than the speed of light in air.
[2]
[Total: 6]

12
8 A battery is made up of 8 cells in series. Each cell has an e.m.f. of 1.5 V.
The battery is connected to one 8.0 Ω resistor for 40 minutes.
(a) Calculate the e.m.f. of the battery.
e.m.f. = ...........................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the energy transferred from the battery in 40 minutes.
energy = ...........................................................[4]
(c) Describe the energy changes that take place during the 40 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a gardener cutting damp grass with a high-powered electric mower.
weather-proof
socket on wall damp grass
gardener
extension cable
with thin wires
electric
plug mower
excess length of socket designed

cable coiled up for indoor use cut in insulation
covered with tape
Fig. 9.1
The mower cable has thick wires appropriate for the current of the mower and the correct fuse.
This cable is too short, and so the gardener uses an extension cable with thin wires, intended for
use with a reading lamp. This cable has no fuse.
Discuss any dangers of the electrical arrangement shown in Fig. 9.1.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 4]

14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a wire AB suspended on two supports so that it is between the poles of a strong
magnet.
The wire AB is loosely held so that it is free to move.
A B
S
support support
N
magnet
power supply
Fig. 10.1
Describe and explain any movement of the wire AB when there is
(a) a large direct current (d.c.) in the wire in the direction from A to B,
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) a large alternating current (a.c.) in the wire.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

15
11 (a) State what is meant by
(i) an electric field,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the direction of an electric field at a point.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows a positively charged sphere.
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, draw the pattern of the electric field in the region around the positively charged
sphere. Show the direction of the field with arrows. [2]
(c) The charge on the sphere in (b) is + 2.0 × 10–5 C. A high resistance wire is now connected
between the sphere and earth. It takes 20 minutes for the sphere to become completely
discharged through the wire.
(i) Suggest why there is a current in the wire between the sphere and earth.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the average current in the wire between the sphere and earth.
average current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

16
12 The nuclear equation below shows the decay of a plutonium (Pu) nucleus to an americium (Am)
nucleus and a β-particle.
241 241
Z
Pu 95
Am +β
(a) (i) State the quantity that is represented by the letter Z in this equation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the numerical value of Z.
Z = ..........................................[1]
(b) The americium nucleus decays by the emission of an α-particle into a neptunium (Np)
nucleus.
Complete the nuclear equation for this decay.

241
95
Am
[2]
(c) The half-life of this americium nuclide is 470 years. A sample of this nuclide contains
8.0 × 1014 atoms.
After some time, 6.0 × 1014 americium atoms have decayed.
Calculate the time required for this decay.
time = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

* 1 7 8 5 8 2 3 7 0 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/AR) 116042/5
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a student travelling down a hill in an unpowered vehicle.
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 is part of the speed-time graph for the vehicle travelling down the hill.
8 C
speed
m/s
6
4 B
A
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(a) (i) State how the graph shows that the acceleration is constant between A and B.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the acceleration between A and B.
acceleration = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

3
(iii) Describe how the acceleration changes between B and C.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Use Fig. 1.2 to obtain an approximate value for the distance travelled by the vehicle in the first
10 s, as shown on the graph.
distance = .......................................................... [4]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) (i) State an expression for the kinetic energy of an object of mass m that is moving with a
speed v.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State and explain whether kinetic energy is a scalar quantity or a vector quantity.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows two fairground “bumper” cars.
stationary moving
empty car car
50 kg 2.5 m / s 200 kg
springs
Fig. 2.1
The car with passengers, of total mass 200 kg, is moving in a straight line. It is travelling at
2.5 m / s when it hits a stationary empty car of mass 50 kg.
After the collision, the empty car moves forwards in the same direction at a speed of 4.0 m / s.
For the car with passengers, determine
(i) its momentum when it is travelling at 2.5 m / s,
momentum = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the speed and direction of its motion immediately after the collision.
speed = ...............................................................
direction: ...............................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

5
(iii) Fixed to the front and the back of the cars are large springs.
When the cars collide the springs compress.
The total kinetic energy of the cars after the collision is equal to the total kinetic energy
before the collision.
Describe the energy transfers that occur as the cars collide and then separate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a mercury barometer correctly set up to measure the atmospheric pressure in
mm Hg (millimetres of mercury).
tube
mercury
dish
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State what is in the space labelled P.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 3.1, mark carefully the length which gives the atmospheric pressure. [1]
(iii) The tube containing mercury is pushed further down into the dish.
State what happens, if anything, to the vertical distance between the mercury surface in
the tube and the mercury surface in the dish.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Another barometer is set up incorrectly. The space P contains some air which exerts a
pressure equivalent to 15 mm Hg. The true atmospheric pressure is 760 mm Hg.
(i) Calculate the reading of atmospheric pressure given by the barometer.
reading = ............................................. mm Hg [1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

7
(ii) The tube is now pushed down into the dish so that the volume of the space P is reduced
from 12.0 cm3 to 4.0 cm3.
Calculate the new reading of atmospheric pressure given by the barometer.
reading = ............................................. mm Hg [4]
[Total: 8]

8
4 A small wind turbine drives a generator to provide electricity for an isolated village.
(a) The decrease in kinetic energy of the wind striking the turbine is 16 200 J every second. The
output of the generator is 23 A at 240 V.
Calculate the efficiency of the turbine and generator.
efficiency = .......................................................... [4]
(b) When electrical energy is not required, the generator charges batteries that then provide
electricity during periods of no wind.
State the term used to describe the energy stored in the batteries.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The use of wind turbines on a large scale has environmental and economic impacts.
Describe one environmental impact and one economic impact.
environmental ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
economic ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

9
5 (a) State a comparison of
(i) the arrangement of the molecules in ice and in liquid water,
ice ......................................................................................................................................
liquid water ........................................................................................................................

[1]
(ii) the movement of the molecules of ice and liquid water.
ice ......................................................................................................................................
liquid water ........................................................................................................................

[1]
(b) The mass of the ice on an ice-hockey rink is 51 000 kg.
(i) The density of ice is 920 kg / m3.
Calculate the volume of ice on the rink.
volume = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) To form the ice, water at 0 °C was poured onto the floor of the rink and then frozen. The
specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate the quantity of energy removed from the water to form this ice at 0 °C.
energy = .......................................................... [2]
(c) The temperature of the ice is monitored by a thermometer made up of wires of two different
metals connected to a remote voltmeter. The junction of the two wires is embedded in the ice.
State the name of this type of thermometer.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

10
6 (a) (i) The pitch of a sound wave increases.
Tick one box to indicate the change that occurs.
amplitude decreases
amplitude increases
frequency decreases
frequency increases
[1]
(ii) The loudness of a sound wave increases.
Tick one box to indicate the change that occurs.
amplitude decreases
amplitude increases
frequency decreases
frequency increases
[1]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows an astronaut and a spacecraft on the surface of the Moon, where there is no
atmosphere.
Fig. 6.1
A piece of machinery within the spacecraft produces a loud sound of frequency 12 kHz.
Tick the one box that indicates the reason why the astronaut cannot hear this sound.
The material of the space suit is soundproof.
Sound cannot travel through a vacuum.
Sound of frequency 12 kHz cannot travel through the air in the spacesuit.
Sound of frequency 12 kHz cannot be heard by any human ear.

[1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

11
(c) Some training for space travel is carried out under water.
(i) State an approximate value for the speed of sound in water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the wavelength in water of a sound wave of frequency 12 kHz.
wavelength = .......................................................... [2]
(d) Fig. 6.2 shows successive crests of a water wave approaching a narrow gap in a barrier.
gap
barrier barrier
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three crests of the wave that have just passed through the gap in the barrier.
[3]
[Total: 9]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

13
7 (a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a thermistor.
[1]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows the connections between two logic gates.
A D
B
E
C
Fig. 7.1
Complete the truth table of this combination of logic gates.
inputs intermediate output

point
A B C D E
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
(c) In the space below, draw a truth table to show the action of a NOT gate.
[2]
[Total: 6]

14
8 A student draws a diagram to represent the electromagnetic spectrum.
Fig. 8.1 is the student’s diagram.
visible light
gamma-rays X-rays ultrasound infra-red microwaves earthquake

radiation radiation waves
increasing wavelength
Fig. 8.1
The student has made two mistakes.
(a) On Fig. 8.1, cross out what is wrong and correct the diagram. [2]
(b) The speed of light in an optical fibre is 2.0 × 108 m / s.
(i) State the speed of light in a vacuum.
speed of light = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) For light in the material from which the optical fibre is made, calculate
1. the refractive index,
refractive index = .......................................................... [2]
2. the critical angle.
critical angle = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

15
(iii) Fig. 8.2 shows a section of the optical fibre.
ray
optical
fibre
Fig. 8.2
Light is travelling in the optical fibre.
State the full name of the process that takes place each time the light changes direction.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

16
9 Fig. 9.1 is a circuit diagram.
60 1
55 1
30 1
Fig. 9.1
The circuit consists of three resistors and three identical 1.5 V cells.
(a) State the total electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the three 1.5 V cells in series.
total e.m.f. = .......................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the combined resistance of the resistors in parallel,
resistance = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the total resistance of the circuit,
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
(iii) the current in the 55 Ω resistor.
current = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

17
(c) The currents in the 30 Ω, the 55 Ω and the 60 Ω resistors are all different.
State the resistance of the resistor in which the current is
(i) the largest,
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) the smallest.
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

18
10 (a) The size of the charge on an electron is e. Since the charge on an electron is negative, it is
written –e.
Complete the table by writing down the charges, in terms of e, on the particles and radioactive
emissions shown.
particle charge
proton
neutron
α-particle
β-particle
γ-ray
[3]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a radioactive source emitting α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays into a vacuum
tube.
N pole of
vacuum
strong magnet
radioactive N
source
S
block of lead
with hole
S pole of
tube
strong magnet
Fig. 10.1
The block of lead ensures that the radiation is in a narrow beam when it passes between the
poles of the magnet.
State the direction of any deflection of
(i) the α-particles,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

19
(ii) the β-particles,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) the γ-rays.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

20
11 A radioactive nuclide has a half-life of 4.0 days. A sample contains 9.6 × 108 atoms of the nuclide.
(a) Calculate the number of atoms of the nuclide remaining after 12 days.
number = .......................................................... [2]
(b) The count rate from the sample is measured in a laboratory where the background count rate
is 16 counts / minute.
A detector is placed at a fixed distance from the sample. The initial count rate measured by
the detector is 160 counts / minute.
Calculate the count rate measured by the detector after 12 days.
count rate = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

* 1 0 3 0 9 9 4 3 8 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/FD) 116044/8
2
1 A diver in the sea uses breathing apparatus, which releases gas bubbles.
Fig. 1.1 shows bubbles rising to the surface.
Fig. 1.1
The bubbles start from rest and, at first, they move upwards with a constant acceleration.
Fig. 1.2 is an incomplete speed-time graph for one of the bubbles from time t = 0 s until t = 10 s.
2.5
2.0
speed
m/s
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
t/s
Fig. 1.2
(a) Using Fig. 1.2, determine the acceleration of the bubble during the first 2.0 s.
acceleration = .......................................................... [3]
(b) (i) After t = 2.0 s, the acceleration of this bubble decreases gradually until at t = 10 s its
acceleration is zero.
Complete Fig. 1.2, by sketching a possible continuation of the speed-time graph. [2]
(ii) State the name given to a negative acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16
3
2 Two mechanics, A and B, are trying to use a two-person spanner (wrench) to loosen a nut on a
large wheel.
Fig. 2.1 shows the forces exerted by the two mechanics.
wheel
nuts
two-person
spanner (wrench)
500 N force 400 N force

exerted by exerted by
mechanic A mechanic B
1.2 m 1.2 m
Fig. 2.1
Mechanic A exerts a force of 500 N at a distance of 1.2 m from nut P. Mechanic B exerts a force of
400 N at a distance of 1.2 m on the other side of nut P.
(a) Calculate the magnitude and the direction of the resultant moment exerted by the mechanics
on nut P.
magnitude of resultant moment = ...............................................................
direction ...............................................................
[4]
(b) Mechanic B reverses the direction of the 400 N force that he exerts on the spanner.
Mechanic A continues to exert the same force of 500 N downwards.
(i) Calculate the magnitude of the new resultant moment exerted by the mechanics.
magnitude of resultant moment = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the resultant force now exerted by the mechanics on the spanner.
force = .......................................................... [1]

[Total: 6]
4
3 (a) (i) State how a vector quantity differs from a scalar quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State and explain whether momentum is a vector quantity or a scalar quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A spacecraft of mass 35 kg is travelling in a straight line at a velocity of 1200 m / s. Assume no

external forces act on the spacecraft.
Calculate
(i) the momentum of the spacecraft,
momentum = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the kinetic energy of the spacecraft.
kinetic energy = .......................................................... [2]
(c) The rocket fuel stored in the moving spacecraft in (b) explodes and the spacecraft splits into
two sections. One section speeds up and the other section slows down.
(i) State what happens to the total momentum.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Predict and explain what happens to the total kinetic energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

5
4 A manometer containing a liquid X, is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply. Fig. 4.1
shows the manometer.
gas
supply
liquid X
Fig. 4.1
Atmospheric pressure is 9.9 × 104 Pa.
(a) The height h is 0.36 m. The density of liquid X is 840 kg / m3.
Calculate
(i) the pressure due to a column of liquid X of height 0.36 m,
pressure = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the pressure of the gas supply.
pressure = .......................................................... [1]
(b) The pressure of the gas supply stays constant.
Describe what happens to the liquid levels when
(i) the liquid X is replaced by the same volume of a liquid of greater density,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) a manometer tube with a slightly smaller area of cross-section, containing an identical
volume of liquid X, is used.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
6
5 (a) (i) The temperature of a quantity of air is increased.
Describe the effect of this increase in temperature on the air molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The temperature of a block of aluminium is decreased.
Describe the effect of this decrease in temperature on the density of the aluminium.
Explain your answer in terms of the separation of the atoms.
effect ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A road is covered with a layer of snow. The temperature of the snow is 0 °C. The specific
latent heat of fusion of snow is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
The snow forms a layer of uniform thickness on the road surface.
(i) Calculate the power needed to melt 0.12 kg of the snow in 220 s.
power = .......................................................... [4]
(ii) The snow is melted by solar radiation. In 220 s, exactly 0.12 kg of the snow melts to
produce water at 0 °C.
The power of the solar radiation incident on each 0.12 kg of snow is greater than the
power calculated in (b)(i).
Suggest one reason why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

7
BLANK PAGE

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows the crests of a wave in the sea as it reaches the entrance to a harbour.
sea harbour
harbour wall
gap
Fig. 6.1
(i) The wave reaches the gap in the harbour wall and passes into the harbour.
On Fig. 6.1, draw the first three crests to the right of the harbour wall. [3]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

9
(ii) A wave with a larger wavelength approaches the harbour. Fig. 6.2 shows this wave.
sea harbour
direction of
travel of
wave
harbour wall
gap
Fig. 6.2
This second wave reaches the gap in the harbour wall and passes into the harbour.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the first three crests to the right of the harbour wall. [1]
(b) An earthquake produces two types of wave, P-waves and S-waves.
The vibrations in P-waves are parallel to the direction of travel of the wave.
The vibrations in S-waves are perpendicular to the direction of travel of the wave.
Place one tick for each type of wave, to indicate whether it is longitudinal or transverse.
type of wave longitudinal wave transverse wave

electromagnetic wave
P-wave
S-wave
sound wave
ultrasound wave
[3]
[Total: 7]

10
7 Some of the components of the electromagnetic spectrum, in order of decreasing wavelength, are
shown.
radio waves microwaves visible light ultraviolet radiation gamma rays
(a) (i) State the speed at which all electromagnetic waves travel in a vacuum.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State which of the components of the electromagnetic spectrum shown has the lowest
frequency.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Two components of the electromagnetic spectrum are not listed above.
State the names of these components.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) One application of microwaves is in microwave ovens, which cook food very quickly.
Fig. 7.1 shows the inside of the glass door of a microwave oven, covered with a metal mesh.
metal mesh
Fig. 7.1
The metal mesh prevents the microwaves from escaping by reflecting them back into the
oven.
(i) Suggest one reason why it is sensible to prevent microwaves from escaping.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one further application of microwaves, other than in microwave ovens.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

11
8 For blue light, the refractive index of a particular type of transparent plastic is 1.5.
(a) Calculate the critical angle for blue light in this type of plastic.
critical angle = .......................................................... [2]
(b) A block is made of this type of plastic. Blue light travelling in a vacuum is incident on the side
of the block at point P.
Fig. 8.1 shows that the angle of incidence is 45°.
45°
Fig. 8.1
At P, some of the light is refracted into the block and some of the light is reflected.
(i) The blue light used in this experiment is monochromatic.
State, in terms of a measurable quantity, what is meant by monochromatic.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the angle of refraction of the light in the block.
angle of refraction = .......................................................... [2]
(iii) On Fig. 8.1, draw the path taken by the light that passes into the block and the path of
the light that is reflected at P. [1]
[Total: 6]

12
9 A circuit consists of a 12 V battery, three resistors and a switch.
Fig. 9.1 is the circuit diagram.
12 V
28 Ω 20 Ω
24 Ω
Fig. 9.1
(a) The battery consists of 2.0 V cells in series.
State the number of 2.0 V cells in series in the battery.
number of cells = .......................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the combined resistance of the two resistors in series,
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) the total resistance of the circuit.
resistance = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

13
(c) The switch is closed.
Calculate
(i) the current in the 20 Ω resistor,
current = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the charge that flows through the 20 Ω resistor in 6.0 minutes.
charge = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 A wire AB hangs loosely between the N pole and the S pole of a strong magnet.
Fig. 10.1 shows the arrangement.
power
supply B
Fig. 10.1
(a) The wire is connected to a power supply.
(i) When the power supply is switched on, there is a very large direct current (d.c.) in the
wire in the direction from B to A.
Describe what happens to the wire as the power supply is switched on.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The power supply is adjusted and there is now a large alternating current (a.c.) in the
wire.
Describe what happens to the wire.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

15
(b) The power supply is removed from the circuit and a galvanometer is connected in its place.
(i) The wire is moved quickly to the right, between the poles of the magnet.
Explain why the galvanometer registers a current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what is observed on the galvanometer when the wire is moved to the left at the
same speed as in (b)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State what is observed on the galvanometer when the wire is moved to the right at a
much lower speed than in (b)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

16
11 (a) State, using nuclide notation, the symbol for
(i) an iron (atomic symbol Fe) nucleus which has nucleon number 56 and proton number 26,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) a platinum (atomic symbol Pt) nucleus which contains 78 protons and 118 neutrons.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) A nucleus of plutonium-238 ( 238

94Pu) decays to a uranium (atomic symbol U) nucleus by
the emission of an α-particle.
Write down the nuclear equation that represents this radioactive decay.
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The half-life of plutonium-238 is 90 years. A sample contains 9.6 × 10 10 atoms

of plutonium-238.
Predict the number of plutonium-238 atoms in the sample that decay in 270 years.
number of atoms that decay = .......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

* 4 8 1 7 9 3 4 4 7 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/32
Paper 3 Extended February/March 2015
1 hour 15 minutes

Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
DC (NF/JG) 95528/2
2
1 (a) A large stone, initially at rest, falls from the top of a building. The stone takes 3.2 s to fall to the
ground. For this stone, air resistance can be ignored.
(i) Stating the formula that you use, show that the speed of the stone when it hits the ground
is 32 m / s.
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the fall of the stone. Label with an X the line
on the graph. [1]
40
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(iii) Use the graph in (ii) to determine the height of the building.
height = ........................................................ [2]
(b) A smaller stone than the stone in (a) falls from the same building. This stone is affected by air
resistance.
(i) What happens to the air resistance as the stone falls? Underline your choice of answer.
Air resistance decreases. Air resistance is constant. Air resistance increases. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 1.1, draw a possible speed-time graph for the fall of this stone. Label with a Y this
line on the graph. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/F/M/15
3
2 The rocket shown in Fig. 2.1 is about to be launched.
rocket
Fig. 2.1
The total mass of the rocket and its full load of fuel is 2.8 × 106 kg. The constant force provided by
the rocket’s motors is 3.2 × 107 N.
(a) Calculate
(i) the total weight of the rocket and the fuel,
weight = ........................................................ [1]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the rocket,
resultant force = ........................................................ [2]
(iii) the vertical acceleration of the rocket immediately after lift-off.
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(b) Suggest why the acceleration of the rocket increases as it rises above the Earth’s surface.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
4
3 (a) Complete the following statement.
An object is in equilibrium when both the .................................................................. and the
.................................................................. on the object are zero. [2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a ladder AB. End A of the ladder rests against a vertical wall. End B rests on
rough ground.
A F
ladder
wall
3.2 m
1.2 m
P
B ground
240 N
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.1 shows two of the forces acting on the ladder. The only force on the ladder at A is F,
which acts at right-angles to the wall. The weight of the ladder is 240 N acting at the centre of
mass of the ladder.
(i) 1. Calculate the moment of the weight of the ladder about point B.
moment = ........................................................ [1]
2. Write an expression, in terms of F, for the moment of F about point B.
moment = ........................................................ [1]
(ii) Use your answers from (i) to calculate F.
F = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/F/M/15
5
(iii) Explain why there must be an upwards force acting on the ladder at B.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]

6
4 A scientist finds that the temperature of the water at the bottom of waterfalls is greater than the
temperature of the water at the tops of those waterfalls.
(a) (i) State the type of energy that falling water has because of its motion.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) In one waterfall, the water falls 300 m.
Calculate the decrease in the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of 1.0 kg of water as it
falls through this distance.
decrease in g.p.e. = ........................................................ [2]
(iii) Assume that the increase in internal energy of the 1.0 kg of water is equal to its decrease
in g.p.e.
Calculate the rise in temperature of the water. The specific heat capacity of water is
4200 J / (kg °C).
rise in temperature = ........................................................ [2]
(iv) Suggest a reason why the actual increase in temperature of the water is less than the
value calculated in (a)(iii).
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State why the thermometer used to measure the temperature of the water in the scientist’s
experiment required a high sensitivity.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/F/M/15

7
5 (a) State the type of electromagnetic radiation
(i) used in luggage security checks at airports,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) used by remote controls for TV sets.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) The electromagnetic waves used in a microwave oven have a frequency of 2.45 × 109 Hz.
The speed of the waves is 3.00 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the waves.
wavelength = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) A 150 g block of ice at 0 °C is placed in the oven. The input power of the oven is 1100 W.
The energy absorbed by the block is 65% of the input energy.
Calculate the time taken to melt the ice to water at 0 °C. The specific latent heat of fusion
of ice is 330 J / g.
time = ........................................................ [4]
[Total: 8]

8
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a glass block ABCD surrounded by air. A ray of red light, PQ, is incident on face CD
of the block.
A B
D Q C
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1,
(i) draw the normal at Q and the refracted ray inside the block so that it meets face AB,
(ii) draw the ray emerging from face AB of the block and the normal where the ray emerges,
(iii) between the rays and the normals you have drawn, label two equal angles X.
[3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/F/M/15

9
(b) The angle of incidence of another red ray is 65°. The refractive index of the glass of block
ABCD for red light is 1.62.
(i) Calculate the angle of refraction in the glass for this ray.
angle = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the speed of the red light in the glass.
speed = ........................................................ [2]
(c) For the same angle of incidence, the angle of refraction of red light in glass is greater than the
angle of refraction of violet light.
State the term which describes the separation of red and violet refracted rays in glass.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) (i) State what is meant by an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Fig. 7.1 shows a small, positively charged sphere.
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, sketch the pattern of the electric field in the space around the sphere. [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/F/M/15

11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a metal sphere on an insulating support.
Fig. 7.2
A student has available two rods, one charged positively and one charged negatively. Using
one of these rods, she gives the sphere a uniform negative charge by induction.
State which rod she chooses, and describe the procedure she follows.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
. ..................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]

12
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a 12.0 V battery connected to a resistor and a component X in series.
4.0 1
X
12.0 V
Fig. 8.1
(i) Identify the component X.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The p.d. across the 4.0 Ω resistor is 11.3 V.
Calculate
1. the p.d. across component X,
p.d. = ........................................................ [1]
2. the current in the 4.0 Ω resistor.
current = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/F/M/15

13
(b) The circuit in Fig. 8.1 is now modified as shown in Fig. 8.2.
8.0 1
4.0 1
12.0 V
Fig. 8.2
(i) Calculate
1. the current in the 8.0 Ω resistor,
current = ........................................................ [1]
2. the current in the battery.
current = ........................................................ [1]
(ii) The battery is now reversed.
State the current in the battery.
current = ........................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]

14
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a simple electric motor with a single rectangular coil between magnetic poles X
and Y.
coil
X Y
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Add labels to the empty boxes to the right of Fig. 9.1, to identify the parts indicated. [2]
(ii) The coil rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from point P.
State which of the magnetic poles, X or Y, is the N-pole. .............................................. [1]
(b) (i) Suggest two changes that cause the motor to spin faster.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the effect on the motor of reversing the connections to the battery.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The battery in Fig. 9.1 is replaced with a resistor. The coil is made to rotate by an external
mechanism.
Explain why there is a current in the resistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/F/M/15

15
10 Some older types of oscilloscope contain a cathode-ray tube.
(a) In a cathode-ray tube,
(i) 1. state the purpose of the heater,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. identify the electrode that emits electrons,
...........................................................................................................................................
3. identify the electrode that accelerates electrons.
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Explain why the space inside the tube is a vacuum.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The trace shown in Fig. 10.1 is seen on the screen of the tube.
Fig. 10.1
State
(i) what causes the up and down movement of the electron beam,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) what causes the horizontal movement of the electron beam,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) how the peak-to-peak height of the trace on the screen can be reduced.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
16
11 In a famous experiment, a beam consisting of a very large number of α-particles was projected, in
a vacuum, at a very thin gold foil.
Fig. 11.1 shows the paths of three of the α-particles A, B and C travelling towards the foil.
gold foil
Fig. 11.1
α-particle A is travelling along a line which does not pass very close to a gold nucleus.
α-particle B is travelling along a line which passes close to a gold nucleus.
α-particle C is travelling directly towards a gold nucleus.
(a) Explain why an α-particle and a gold nucleus repel each other.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 11.1, draw lines with arrows to show the continuation of the paths of α-particles A, B
and C. [3]
(c) State two conclusions, about gold atoms, which resulted from the experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/F/M/15

* 8 9 8 1 3 3 5 6 7 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended May/June 2015
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/JG) 94500/2
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

3
1 (a) Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show speed-time graphs for two objects, each moving in a straight line.
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(i) Describe the motion of the object shown by the graph in Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe the motion of the object shown by the graph in Fig. 1.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) On a day with no wind, a large object is dropped from a tall building. The object experiences
air resistance during its fall to the ground.
State and explain, in terms of the forces acting, how the acceleration of the object varies
during its fall.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]

4
2 A large stone block is to be part of a harbour wall. The block is supported beneath the surface of
the sea by a cable from a crane. Fig. 2.1 shows the block with its top face a distance h beneath the
surface of the sea.
cable
surface of sea
h
block
Fig. 2.1
The force acting downwards on the top face of the block, due to the atmosphere and the depth h
of water, is 3.5 × 104 N.
(a) The top face of the block has an area of 0.25 m2.
(i) Calculate the pressure on the top face of the block.
pressure = ................................................ [2]
(ii) The atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
Calculate the pressure on the top face of the block due to the depth h of water.
pressure = ................................................ [1]
(iii) The density of sea water is 1020 kg / m3.
Calculate the depth h.
h = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

5
(b) Suggest two reasons why the tension force in the cable is not 3.5 × 104 N.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The block is lowered so that it rests on the sea-bed.
State what happens to the tension force in the cable.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an early water-powered device used to raise a heavy load. The heavy load rests on
piston B.
cylinder A cylinder B
water load
piston A piston B
connecting rod connecting rod
pivot beam
Initially, a large weight of water in cylinder A pushes piston A down. This causes the left-hand end
of the beam to move down and the right-hand end of the beam to move up. Piston B rises, lifting
the heavy load.
(a) The weight of water in cylinder A is 80 kN.
Calculate the mass of water in cylinder A.
mass = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

7
(b) The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
Calculate the volume of water in cylinder A.
volume = ................................................ [2]
(c) Piston A moves down a distance of 4.0 m.
Calculate the gravitational potential energy lost by the water.
loss of gravitational potential energy = ................................................ [2]
(d) The heavy load lifted by piston B gains 96 kJ of gravitational potential energy.
Calculate the efficiency of the device.
efficiency = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]

8
4 (a) (i) State two ways in which the molecular structure of a liquid is different from the molecular
structure of a solid.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain, in terms of energy, the process which takes place as a solid at its melting point
changes into a liquid at the same temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) During a severe snowstorm, a layer of snow (ice crystals) forms on the body of an animal in a
field. The snow and the surrounding air are at 0 °C. The snow begins to melt.
(i) The mass of snow that falls on the animal is 1.65 kg. The specific latent heat of fusion of
snow is 330 000 J / kg.
Calculate the thermal energy needed to melt this snow.
thermal energy = ............................................... [2]
(ii) The animal derives energy from its food to maintain its body temperature.
State the energy change that takes place.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

9
5 (a) State what is meant by the specific heat capacity of a substance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A student carries out an experiment to find the specific heat capacity of aluminium. He uses
an electric heater and a thermometer, inserted into separate holes in an aluminium block.
The following data are obtained.
mass of aluminium block = 2.0 kg

power of heating element = 420 W
time of heating = 95 s
initial temperature of block = 19.5 °C
final temperature of block = 40.5 °C
Calculate the value of the specific heat capacity of aluminium given by this experiment.
specific heat capacity = ............................................... [4]
(c) In the experiment in (b), no attempt is made to prevent loss of thermal energy from the
surfaces of the block.
Suggest two actions the student could take to reduce the loss of thermal energy from the
surfaces of the block.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

10
6 A water wave in a tank travels from a region where the speed of the wave is faster into a region
where it is slower.
Fig. 6.1 is a one-quarter scale diagram that shows the wavefronts in the region where the speed is
faster.
faster region
wavefronts
tank
slower region
Fig. 6.1 (scale: 1.0 cm represents 4.0 cm)
(a) (i) Take measurements from the scale diagram in Fig. 6.1 to determine the wavelength of
the water wave as it travels in the faster region.
wavelength = ................................................ [2]
(ii) The speed of the wave in the faster region is 0.39 m / s.
frequency = ................................................ [2]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw lines that indicate the positions of the wavefronts of the water wave in the
slower region. [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

11
(c) State what happens to the frequency of the water wave as it passes into the slower region.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

13
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 represents an object O placed in front of a converging lens.
O
P Q R S
Fig. 7.1
(i) State a full description of the image I.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Using the letters on Fig. 7.1, identify the focal length of the lens.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) On Fig. 7.1, draw an eye suitably placed to view the image I. [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows an object O placed to the left of a converging lens. A principal focus of the lens
is at the position marked F.
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw two rays to locate the image of object O. Draw the image.
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, draw one other ray from the upper tip of O to the image.
[4]
[Total: 8]

14
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a bar magnet suspended by a spring over a coil. The coil is connected to a
sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.
spring
magnet
sensitive
coil centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 8.1
(i) The lower end of the magnet is pushed down into the upper end of the coil and
held at rest.
During the movement, an e.m.f. is induced in the coil. The meter shows a deflection to
the right and then returns to zero.
Explain why this e.m.f. is induced.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what happens to the needle of the meter when
1. the magnet is released from rest and is pulled up by the spring,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. the magnet continues to oscillate up and down, moving in and out of the coil with
each oscillation.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

15
240 V 6.0 V
mains coil P 8000 coil S lamp
turns
Fig. 8.2
The primary coil P, connected to the 240 V mains supply, has 8000 turns. The secondary
coil S supplies 6.0 V to a lamp.
(i) Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.
number of turns = ................................................ [2]
(ii) 1. The current in the primary coil is 0.050 A.
Calculate the power input to the transformer.
power = ................................................ [1]
2. 90% of the power input to the transformer is transferred to the lamp.
Calculate the current in the lamp.
current = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]

16
9 In Fig. 9.1, a 12 V battery supplies a current I to a circuit. The circuit contains a thermistor and a
1000 Ω resistor in parallel, with a 500 Ω resistor in series.
12 V
500 1
1000 1
Fig. 9.1
(a) At a certain temperature, the thermistor has a resistance of 1000 Ω.
Calculate
(i) the combined resistance of the thermistor and the 1000 Ω resistor,
resistance = ................................................ [2]
(ii) the current I,
current = ................................................ [1]
(iii) the potential difference across the 500 Ω resistor.
potential difference = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

17
(b) The temperature of the thermistor is increased so that its resistance decreases.
State the effect of this change in resistance on the current through the 500 Ω resistor. Explain
your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]

18
10 Fig. 10.1 shows two parallel conducting plates connected to a very high voltage supply.
+ –
+ – conducting plate
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
voltage
supply
Fig. 10.1
The left-hand plate is positively charged and the right-hand plate is negatively charged.
(a) On Fig. 10.1, draw the electric field pattern produced between the charged plates. Use arrows
to show the direction of the field. [2]
(b) A light, conducting ball is suspended by an insulating string. Fig. 10.2 shows the ball in the
middle of the gap between the plates.
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
voltage
supply
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, show the distribution of charge on the ball. [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

19
(c) The ball is displaced to the left and then oscillates backwards and forwards between the two
plates.
The ball touches a plate once every 0.05 s. Every time it touches a plate, a charge of
2.8 × 10−8 C (0.000 000 028 C) is transferred.
Calculate the average current produced by the repeated transfer of charge.
current = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 6]
Question 11 is on the next page.

20
11 (a) State the nature of γ-rays.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A beam of α-particles and β-particles passes, in a vacuum, between the poles of a strong
magnet.
Compare the deflections of the paths of the two types of particle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A beam of β-particles passes, in a vacuum, through the electric field between a pair of
oppositely charged metal plates.
Describe the path of the particles.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) The nuclear equation shows the decay of an isotope of polonium.
A Po 206 Pb + 42 X
Z 82
(i) State the nature of X.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the values of A and Z.
A = .................... Z = ..................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/M/J/15

* 0 8 0 7 7 2 4 1 5 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/32
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/SW) 91111/3
2
1 An experiment is carried out to find the acceleration of free fall.
A strip of paper is attached to a heavy object. The object is dropped and falls to the ground, pulling
the paper strip through a timer. The timer marks dots on the paper strip at intervals of 0.020 s.
Fig. 1.1 shows a section of the paper strip with the first three dots marked. The first dot on the
paper strip, labelled A, is marked at the instant the object is dropped.
0.0076 m
A 0.0019 m
paper strip
(a) State how the dots on the paper strip show that the object is accelerating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the average speed of the object
(i) in the first 0.020 s after the object is dropped,
average speed = .............................................................
(ii) in the second 0.020 s after the object is dropped.
average speed = .............................................................

[3]
(c) Use the results from (b) to calculate the acceleration of the falling object.
acceleration = .........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a cylinder containing gas compressed by the movement of a piston.
compressed gas
final position of piston
cylinder
initial position of piston
Fig. 2.1
Initially the volume of the gas was 470 cm3. The piston moves up and compresses the gas to a
volume of 60 cm3. The whole arrangement is left for some time until the gas cools to its original
temperature. The pressure of the gas is now 800 kPa.
(a) Calculate the initial pressure of the gas.
pressure = .........................................................[3]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, the effect on the pressure of the gas if it was not given time to
cool to its original temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The area of the piston is 5.5 × 10–3 m2 (0.0055 m2).
Calculate the force exerted by the gas on the piston when the pressure is 800 kPa.
force = .........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

4
3 An athlete of mass 64 kg is bouncing up and down on a trampoline.
At one moment, the athlete is stationary on the stretched surface of the trampoline. Fig. 3.1 shows
the athlete at this moment.
springs
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the form of energy stored due to the stretching of the surface of the trampoline.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The stretched surface of the trampoline begins to contract. The athlete is pushed vertically
upwards and she accelerates. At time t, when her upwards velocity is 6.0 m / s, she loses
contact with the surface.
(i) Calculate her kinetic energy at time t.
kinetic energy = .........................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the maximum possible distance she can travel upwards after time t.
maximum distance = .........................................................[3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

5
(iii) In practice, she travels upwards through a slightly smaller distance than the distance
calculated in (ii).
Suggest why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The trampoline springs are tested. An extension-load graph is plotted for one spring. Fig. 3.2
is the graph.
extension
0
0 load
Fig. 3.2
(i) State the name of the point X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the name of the law that the spring obeys between the origin of the graph and
point X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a device used as a thermocouple thermometer.
meter Z
wire of material X wire of material X
wire of material Y
Fig. 4.1
In the table put three ticks against the correct statements about the thermocouple
thermometer.
Meter Z measures energy.

Meter Z measures potential difference.
Meter Z measures power.
Materials X and Y are different materials.
Materials X and Y are the same material.
Materials X and Y are electrical conductors.
Materials X and Y are electrical insulators.
[3]
(b) A liquid-in-glass thermometer is replaced by a similar thermometer with a larger bulb. No

other change is made.
State and explain the effect on the sensitivity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

7
(c) The capillary of a liquid-in-glass thermometer should have a constant diameter.
Fig. 4.2 shows the capillary of a thermometer made with a manufacturing fault.
walls of
glass non-uniform
capillary
bulb capillary
State and explain the effect of this fault on the linearity of the thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

8
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

9
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a metal strip, held in a clamp.
metal strip
X
Y
clamp Z
Fig. 5.1
The end of the strip is pulled down and released, so that the strip vibrates. X and Z are the
extreme positions of the end of the strip during this vibration. Y is the mid-position.
Explain what is meant by
(i) the frequency of vibration of the strip,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the amplitude of vibration of the end of the strip.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

10
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows two tall buildings, A and B, that are 99 m apart.
99 m
A B
33 m
A student stands at P so that his distance from building A is 33 m. After clapping his hands
once, he hears several echoes. The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
Calculate the time interval between clapping his hands and hearing
(i) the first echo,
time = .........................................................[2]
(ii) the third echo.
time = .........................................................[1]
(c) Write down an approximate value for the speed of sound
(i) in water, speed = .............................................................
(ii) in steel. speed = .............................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

11
(d) Fig. 5.3 shows a dolphin in water emitting a sound wave of frequency 95 kHz.
Using your value from (c)(i), calculate the wavelength of this sound wave.
wavelength = .........................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

12
6 The refractive index n of glass in air is 1.5.
(a) (i) State the equation that relates the speed of light in air va, the speed of light in glass vg
and n.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the speed of light in glass.
speed = .........................................................[1]
(b) Light travelling in glass strikes the edge of the glass. Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light at an angle
of 41° to the normal.
normal
air
glass
41°
Fig. 6.1
(i) The light passes from the glass into the air.
Calculate the angle that the ray makes with the normal in the air.
angle = .........................................................[2]
(ii) State what happens to light that strikes the edge of the glass at an angle to the normal
much larger than 41°.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

13
(c) Describe one example of how optical fibres are used in medicine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

14
7 A physics teacher suspends two pointers in a magnetic field. One pointer is made of brass and the
other is a magnet.
She holds the pointers in the initial positions shown in the two upper circles of Fig. 7.1. She then
releases the pointers.
brass pointer
N pole of S pole of
magnet magnet
S
arrows show
direction of
strong
magnetic
field
draw final position of brass draw final position of

pointer in this circle magnet in this circle
Fig. 7.1
(a) In the lower circles of Fig. 7.1, draw the settled final positions of the two pointers. [2]
(b) (i) Explain the final position of the brass pointer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain the final position of the magnet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest a material from which the magnet is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

15
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit containing a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V and a heater of
resistance 6.0 Ω.
12 V
A
6.0 1
Fig. 8.1
(a) State what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Calculate the current in the heater.
current = .........................................................[2]
(ii) State the name of the particles that flow through the heater.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) On Fig. 8.1, draw an arrow next to the heater symbol to show the direction of flow of
these particles through the heater. [1]
(c) Calculate the thermal energy produced in the heater in 10 minutes.
thermal energy = .........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

16
9 Fig. 9.1 represents a transformer.
240 V
coil P coil S
a.c.
8000 turns
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Name the process by which a changing current in the primary coil P causes a changing
current in the secondary coil S.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest a material used for the coils. Explain why this material is used.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The input to the primary coil P is 240 V. This coil has 8000 turns of wire. The voltage obtained
between terminals A and B is 12 V.
(i) Calculate the number of turns of wire in the secondary coil S.
number of turns = .........................................................[2]
(ii) The resistor connected between the terminals A and B is replaced by four 12 V lamps
connected in parallel. The current in each lamp is 1.5 A.
Calculate the current in coil P. Assume the transformer is 100% efficient.
current = .........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15
17
10 (a) State the nature of an α-particle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Describe how an electric field between two charged plates could be used to determine
whether a beam of particles consists of α- or β-particles.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Describe the path of γ-rays in a magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State what is meant by the term isotopes. Use the terms proton number and nucleon number
in your explanation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

18
11 Fig. 11.1 shows the main components of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
fluorescent
screen
plate Y1
plate X2
heater
beam
P anode plate plate

system Y2 X1
grid
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) State the function of component P.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Tick one box to complete the sentence correctly.
A cathode-ray oscilloscope contains
air at about five times normal atmospheric pressure.
air at about normal atmospheric pressure.
air at about one fifth of normal atmospheric pressure.
a vacuum.
neon gas.
[1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

19
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows the front view of the screen of the cathode-ray oscilloscope.
B C
Fig. 11.2
With no voltage applied between the X-plates or between the Y-plates, the spot is at A.
(i) Place two ticks in each of the blank columns of the table to describe the voltages across
the plates when the spot is at points B and C. The column for the spot at A has been
completed as an example.
spot at A spot at B spot at C
plate X1 at higher voltage than plate X2
plate X1 at lower voltage than plate X2
no voltage between X-plates ✓

plate Y1 at higher voltage than plate Y2
plate Y1 at lower voltage than plate Y2
no voltage between Y-plates ✓

[3]
(ii) Explain your answers for the spot at point B.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/M/J/15

* 7 6 5 1 5 8 6 9 9 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/33
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW) 105194/1
2
1 At a sports event, a champion runner and a car take part in a race.
(a) The runner runs at a constant speed of 10 m / s from the start of the race. During the first 5.0 s
of the race, the car’s speed increases from 0 m / s to 25 m / s at a uniform rate.
On Fig. 1.1, draw
(i) a graph to show the motion of the runner, [1]
(ii) a graph to show the motion of the car.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
[1]
(b) Use your graphs to determine
(i) the distance travelled by the runner in the 5.0 s,
distance = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the distance travelled by the car in the 5.0 s,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the time at which the car overtakes the runner.
time = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

3
2 An electric train is initially at rest at a railway station. The motor causes a constant force of
360 000 N to act on the train and the train begins to move.
(a) State the form of energy gained by the train as it begins to move.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The train travels a distance of 4.0 km along a straight, horizontal track.
(i) Calculate the work done on the train during this part of the journey.
work done = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the train is 450 000 kg.
Calculate the maximum possible speed of the train at the end of the first 4.0 km of the
journey.
maximum possible speed = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) In practice, the speed of the train is much less than the value calculated in (ii).
Suggest one reason why this is the case.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) After travelling 4.0 km, the train reaches its maximum speed. It continues at this constant
speed on the next section of the track where the track follows a curve which is part of a circle.
State the direction of the resultant force on the train as it follows the curved path.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

4
3 (a) The boxes on the left contain the names of some sources of energy. The boxes on the right
contain properties of some sources of energy.
Draw two straight lines from each box on the left to the two boxes on the right which describe
that source of energy.
renewable
solar energy
not renewable
polluting
natural gas
not polluting
[2]
(b) Coal-fired power stations are polluting.
State an advantage of using coal as a source of energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A coal-fired power station generates electricity at night when it is not needed.
Some of this energy is stored by pumping water up to a mountain lake. When there is high
demand for electricity, the water is allowed to flow back through turbines to generate electricity.
On one occasion, 2.05 × 108 kg of water is pumped up through a vertical height of 500 m.
(i) Calculate the weight of the water.
weight = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

5
(ii) Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the water.
energy gained = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) The electrical energy used to pump the water up to the mountain lake is 1.2 × 1012 J.
Only 6.2 × 1011 J of electrical energy is generated when the water is released.
Calculate the efficiency of this energy storage scheme.
efficiency = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 A liquid-in-glass thermometer has a linear scale and a range of 120 °C.
(a) State what is meant by a linear scale.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The highest temperature that this thermometer can measure is 110 °C.
State the lowest temperature that it can measure.
lowest temperature = ...........................................................[1]
(c) A second liquid-in-glass thermometer has the same range but it has a greater sensitivity.
Suggest two ways in which the second thermometer might differ from the first.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

7
(d) A thermometer has a bulb that is painted white and is shiny.
It is placed in boiling water for several minutes. It is then removed from the water and is held
in air.
Fig. 4.1 shows how the thermometer reading changes during the next 8 minutes.
100
temperature
/ °C
80
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8
time / minutes
Fig. 4.1
The bulb of this thermometer is now re-painted so that it has a matt, black surface.
The procedure is repeated.
(i) On Fig. 4.1, sketch a second line to suggest how the reading of the re-painted
thermometer changes during the 8 minutes. [2]

8
(ii) Tick one of the boxes to show how painting the bulb black affects the linearity of the
scale, the range and the sensitivity of the thermometer.
The linearity, the range and the sensitivity all change.
Only the linearity and the range change.
Only the linearity and the sensitivity change.
Only the range and the sensitivity change.
Only the linearity changes.
Only the range changes.
Only the sensitivity changes.
None of these properties changes.

[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

9
5 (a) State what is meant by the specific latent heat of fusion (melting) of a substance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Ice cubes of total mass 70 g, and at 0 °C, are put into a drink of lemonade of mass 300 g.
All the ice melts as 23 500 J of thermal energy transfers from the lemonade to the ice. The
final temperature of the drink is 0 °C.
(i) Calculate the specific latent heat of fusion for ice.
specific latent heat of fusion = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The thermal energy that causes the ice to melt is transferred from the lemonade as
it cools. The loss of this thermal energy causes the temperature of the 300 g of the
lemonade to fall by 19 °C.
Calculate the specific heat capacity of the lemonade.
specific heat capacity = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) The melting ice floats on top of the lemonade.
Explain the process by which the lemonade at the bottom of the drink becomes cold.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

10
6 A glass, converging lens is used as a magnifying glass to observe a red ant.
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows the lens, the principal axis, and the two principal focuses F1 and F2.
F1 F2
principal axis
lens
Fig. 6.1
(i) 1. On Fig. 6.1, mark a point on the principal axis, labelled A, to indicate a suitable
position for the ant.
2. On Fig. 6.1, mark a point on the principal axis, labelled E, to indicate a suitable
position for the observer’s eye.
[1]
(ii) Tick one of the boxes to indicate where, on the principal axis, the image of the ant is
located.
to the left of F1
between F1 and the lens
within the lens
between the lens and F2
to the right of F2
[1]
(iii) Underline two words in the list that describe the image produced by the magnifying
glass.
diminished inverted real upright virtual

[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

11
(b) (i) The red light from the ant passes into the lens.
As the light enters the lens, state what happens to
1. its wavelength,
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. its frequency.
................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State how the wavelength of violet light in air differs from the wavelength of red light in
air.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

12
7 (a) A sound wave in air consists of alternate compressions and rarefactions along its path.
(i) Explain how a compression differs from a rarefaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of compressions, what is meant by
1. the wavelength of the sound,
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. the frequency of the sound.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) At night, bats emit pulses of sound to detect obstacles and prey. The speed of sound in air is
340 m / s.
(i) A bat emits a pulse of sound of wavelength 0.0085 m.
Calculate the frequency of the sound.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) State why this sound cannot be heard by human beings.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The pulse of sound hits a stationary object and is reflected back to the bat. The pulse is
received by the bat 0.12 s after it was emitted.
Calculate the distance travelled by the pulse of sound during this time.
distance = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15
13
8 (a) A student determines the resistance of a length of aluminium wire.
She connects the wire in series with a battery and a variable resistor. The circuit is shown in
Fig. 8.1.
aluminium wire
Fig. 8.1
She knows that an ammeter and a voltmeter are needed in the circuit.
(i) On Fig. 8.1, draw the circuit symbol for an ammeter connected in a suitable position. [1]
(ii) A variable resistor is included so that the current in the circuit may be changed.
Suggest an advantage of being able to change the current.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Electricity is transmitted from a power station to a distant city using an aluminium cable of
resistance 1.2 Ω. Power loss occurs because of the resistance of the cable.
The current in the cable is 250 A.
(i) Calculate the power loss in the cable.
power loss = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) The aluminium cable is replaced with a new aluminium cable of the same length. The
current remains at 250 A. The diameter of the new cable is double the diameter of the
original cable.
State and explain how the power loss is affected by this change.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
14
9 An extremely violent nuclear reaction is taking place at the centre of the Sun. It is this reaction that
enables the Sun to emit both a very large quantity of energy and an extremely large number of
charged particles.
(a) Name the type of nuclear reaction taking place in the Sun.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Many of the charged particles produced by the Sun are emitted from its surface at high
speeds and travel out into space.
(i) Explain why these particles constitute an electric current.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the equation that relates the electric current I to the charge Q that is flowing. Define
any other terms in the equation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Some of the particles emitted by the Sun travel straight towards the Earth until they enter the
Earth’s magnetic field. Because they constitute a current, they experience a force and are
deflected.
(i) Describe the relationship between the direction of the force and
1. the direction of the current,
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. the direction of the magnetic field.
................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

15
(ii) A negatively charged particle is travelling in a magnetic field. This is represented in

Fig. 9.1. The direction of the magnetic field is into the page.
direction of travel
of particle
magnetic field
into page
negative particle
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow, labelled F, to show the direction of the force that acts on the
particle. [1]
[Total: 6]

16
10 A solenoid is held in a vertical position. The solenoid is connected to a sensitive, centre-zero

ammeter.
A vertical bar magnet is held stationary at position X just above the upper end of the solenoid as
shown in Fig. 10.1.
S
position X magnet
N
solenoid
A
position Y magnet
Fig. 10.1
The magnet is released and it falls through the solenoid. During the initial stage of the fall, the
sensitive ammeter shows a small deflection to the left.
(a) Explain why the ammeter shows a deflection.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The magnet passes the middle point of the solenoid and continues to fall. It reaches
position Y.
Describe and explain what is observed on the ammeter as the magnet falls from the middle
point of the solenoid to position Y.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

17
(c) Suggest two changes to the apparatus that would increase the initial deflection of the
ammeter.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

18
11 (a) An underground water pipe has cracked and water is leaking into the surrounding ground.
Fig. 11.1 shows a technician locating the position of the leak.
technician
ground surface
water that leaked

metal water pipe into ground
crack in water pipe
Fig. 11.1
A radioactive isotope is introduced into the water supply and the water that leaks from the
crack is radioactive.
The technician tries to locate an area above the pipe where the radioactive count rate is
higher than in the surrounding area.
(i) State and explain the type of radiation that must be emitted by the isotope for the leak to
be detected.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The half-life of the isotope used is 6.0 hours.
Explain why an isotope with this half-life is suitable.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

19
(b) Caesium-133 is a stable isotope of the element caesium, but caesium-135 is radioactive.
A nucleus of caesium-133 contains 78 neutrons and a nucleus of caesium-135 contains

80 neutrons.
Put one tick in each row of the table to indicate how the number of particles in a neutral atom
of caesium-133 compares with the number of particles in a neutral atom of caesium-135.
The first row has been completed already.
particles in caesium-133
2 more than 1 more than equal to 1 fewer than 2 fewer than
caesium-135 caesium-135 caesium-135 caesium-135 caesium-135
number of
neutrons ✓
number of
protons
number of
nucleons
number of
electrons
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/M/J/15

* 1 0 2 0 5 4 0 8 9 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended October/November 2015
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/SW) 96031/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a rocket-powered sled travelling along a straight track. The sled is used to test
components before they are sent into space.
sled
track
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for the sled from time t = 0 s.
1000
800
speed
m/s 600
400
200
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(a) On Fig. 1.2, mark a point labelled P to indicate a time when the acceleration of the sled is not
constant. [1]
(b) (i) Calculate the acceleration of the sled at t = 1.0 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Determine the distance travelled by the sled between t = 1.0 s and t = 2.0 s.
distance = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/O/N/15

3
(c) The resultant force acting on the sled remains constant during the test.
Suggest why the acceleration of the sled is not constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]

4
2 (a) (i) Mass is a scalar quantity.
State another scalar quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Force is a vector quantity.
State another vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A boat is floating on still water.
The mass of the boat is 290 000 kg. A resultant force of 50 kN acts on the boat.
Calculate the acceleration of the boat.
acceleration = ...........................................................[3]
(c) Fig. 2.1, not to scale, shows the view from above of the boat, now on a fast-flowing river. The
boat accelerates.
Two forces are shown acting on the boat. The resultant of these forces is at right angles to the
river banks.
river bank
direction of
force from
engine
direction of
river current
direction of boat
force on boat
from river
current
river bank
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/O/N/15

5
Fig. 2.2 is an incomplete vector diagram of the forces acting on the boat.
resultant force
force from river current
Fig. 2.2
The force from the river current is 80 kN.
(i) Determine the scale that has been used in the vector diagram.
scale is ...............................................................
(ii) On Fig. 2.2, complete the vector diagram to determine the magnitude and direction of the
force from the engine. Measure the angle between the direction of the current and the
force from the engine.
magnitude of force from engine = ...............................................................
angle = ...............................................................
[4]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a skier taking part in a downhill race.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of the skier, including his equipment, is 75 kg. In the ski race, the total vertical
change in height is 880 m.
Calculate the decrease in the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the skier.
decrease in g.p.e. = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The skier starts from rest. The total distance travelled by the skier during the descent is
2800 m. The average resistive force on the skier is 220 N.
Calculate
(i) the work done against the resistive force,
work done = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the kinetic energy of the skier as he crosses the finishing line at the end of the race.
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest why the skier bends his body as shown in Fig. 3.1.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/O/N/15

7
4 (a) An object of mass m and specific heat capacity c is supplied with a quantity of thermal
energy Q. The temperature of the object increases by Δθ.
Write down an expression for c in terms of Q, m and Δθ.
c = ............................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows the heating system of a hot water shower.
power supply
cold water in hot water out
heating element
Fig. 4.1
Cold water at 15 °C flows in at the rate of 0.0036 m3 / minute. Hot water flows out at the same
rate.
(i) Calculate the mass of water that passes the heating element in one minute. The density
of water is 1000 kg / m3.
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The power of the heating element is 8.5 kW.
Calculate the temperature of the hot water that flows out. The specific heat capacity of
water is 4200 J /(kg °C).
temperature = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

8
5 (a) Smoke particles are introduced into a glass box containing air. Light shines into the box so
that, when observed through a microscope, the smoke particles can be seen as bright points
of light.
Describe the motion of the smoke particles and account for this motion in terms of the air
molecules.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a quantity of gas in a cylinder sealed by a piston that is free to move.
gas
cylinder piston
Fig. 5.1
(i) The temperature of the gas is increased.
State what happens, if anything,
1. to the piston,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. to the pressure of the gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The piston is now fixed in place and the temperature of the gas is increased further.
Explain, in terms of the behaviour of molecules, what happens to the pressure of the gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/O/N/15
9
6 A sound wave, travelling in air, approaches a solid barrier with a gap in the middle. Fig. 6.1
represents the compressions and rarefactions of the sound wave. The compressions are labelled
A, B and C.
barrier
A B C
compression
rarefaction
Fig. 6.1
(a) State how a compression differs from a rarefaction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s. The frequency of the sound is 850 Hz.
For this wave, determine
(i) the wavelength,
wavelength = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the time that elapses before compression A reaches the barrier.
time = ...........................................................[2]
(c) On Fig. 6.1, draw the shape and positions of compressions B and C as compression A
reaches the barrier. [2]
(d) Sound waves can also travel in water.
State how the speed of sound in water compares with the speed of sound in air.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a convex lens being used to produce an image of an object.
principal
focus
image object
Fig. 7.1
(i) Place three ticks in the table that describe this image.
can only be formed on a screen

diminished
enlarged
inverted
real
same size
upright
virtual
[3]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, mark a letter E to indicate a possible position for an eye to be placed to
observe this image. [1]
(iii) State an application in which a convex lens is used in this way.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/O/N/15

11
(b) In the space below, draw a ray diagram to locate the image of an object of height 1.0 cm
placed 5.0 cm from a convex lens of focal length 2.0 cm. Draw your diagram full size. You are
advised to locate the lens roughly in the centre of the space. Label the image.
[3]
[Total: 8]

12
8 A digital watch is powered by a 1.3 V cell. The cell supplies a current of 4.1 × 10–5 A (0.000041 A)
for 1.6 × 107 s.
Calculate
(a) the charge that passes through the cell in this time,
charge = ...........................................................[2]
(b) the resistance of the electrical circuit in the watch,
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
(c) the output power of the cell.
power = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/O/N/15

13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows two separate coils of wire wound around an iron core.
primary secondary
coil coil
iron core
Fig. 9.1
An a.c. supply is connected across the primary coil and a 12 V lamp is connected across the
secondary coil. The lamp glows with normal brightness.
(a) State the name of the device shown in Fig. 9.1.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain why there is a current in the lamp.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) (i) The coil connected to the lamp has 450 turns. The e.m.f. of the a.c. supply is 240 V.
Calculate the number of turns on the coil connected to the a.c. supply.
number of turns = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) A 240 V d.c. supply is used instead of the 240 V a.c. supply. Tick one box to indicate what
happens to the lamp.
glows more brightly
glows with the same brightness
glows less brightly
does not glow

[1]
[Total: 8]
14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the symbol for a logic gate.
Fig. 10.1
(i) State the name of this gate. ......................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, label an input and an output. [1]
(iii) In the space below, draw the symbol for a NAND gate.
[1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/O/N/15

15
(b) A very low frequency alternating voltage is applied between A and B in the circuit shown in
Fig. 10.2.
A B
A
centre-zero
ammeter
Fig. 10.2
On each diagram, draw a possible position of the indicator needle of the ammeter at the time
in the cycle when
(i) A is positive and B is negative,
–1 0 +1
–2 +2
(ii) there is no p.d. between A and B,
–1 0 +1
–2 +2
(iii) A is negative and B is positive.
–1 0 +1
–2 +2
A
[3]
[Total: 6]

16
11 (a) State, in terms of the particles in each nucleus, how the nuclei of two isotopes of the same
element are different.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows a graph of nucleon number against proton number. The nucleus 21 2 Bi is
83
plotted on the graph at the cross marked P.
213
P
212
nucleon 211
number
210
209
208
79 80 81 82 83 84
proton number
Fig. 11.1
(i) On Fig. 11.1,
1. plot a cross labelled Q for the nucleus formed when the 21 2 Bi nucleus emits an
83
α-particle,
2. plot a cross labelled R for the nucleus formed when the 21 2 Bi nucleus emits a
83
β-particle.
[4]
(ii) The half-life for the decay of 21823 Bi is 60 minutes.
A sample of 21823 Bi is placed at a fixed distance from a detector. The initial measurement
of the count rate from the sample of 21823 Bi is 2400 counts per minute.
Calculate the count rate from the sample 5.0 hours later.
count-rate = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/31/O/N/15

* 5 8 6 2 4 4 5 1 4 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/32
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/SW) 96033/2
2
1 A comet, travelling in space, enters the atmosphere of a planet.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the comet from time t = 0 s.
40 000
speed
m/s 30 000
20 000
10 000
0
0 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) During the period t = 0 s to t = 6.0 s, both the speed of the comet and the velocity of the
comet remain constant.
State what this suggests about the motion of the comet.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Determine the distance travelled during the period t = 0 s to t = 6.0 s.
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Explain what the graph shows about the motion of the comet during the period t = 6.0 s to
t = 10.0 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15

3
(c) Determine the acceleration of the comet at t = 11.0 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(d) Suggest what happens to the comet at t = 12.0 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 A student wishes to find the volume of a piece of wood of irregular shape. Her experiment requires
the use of a small brass object of mass 200 g.
(a) Calculate the volume of the brass object. The density of brass is 8.4 g / cm3.
volume = ...........................................................[2]
(b) To find the volume of the piece of wood, the student has a measuring cylinder, a supply of
water and the brass object in (a). The piece of wood and the brass object are small enough to
be placed in the measuring cylinder.
(i) The piece of wood does not sink in water.
Suggest why.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe what the student does to find the volume of the piece of wood, stating the
measurements that she makes and any calculations required.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15

5
3 (a) (i) Define power.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) In the following list, tick the two boxes next to the two quantities needed to calculate the
work done on an object.
mass of the object
force acting on the object
speed of the object
acceleration of the object
distance moved by the object [1]
(b) A lift (elevator) in a high building transports 12 passengers, each of mass 65 kg, through a
vertical height of 150 m in a time of 64 s.
(i) Calculate the power needed to transport the passengers through this height.
power = ...........................................................[4]
(ii) The lift (elevator) is driven by an electric motor.
State a reason, other than friction, why the power supplied by the motor is greater than
the power needed to transport the passengers.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a top view of a tourist vehicle in a game park and two elephants pushing
against the vehicle. The two forces indicated are at right angles to each other.
vehicle
4.0 kN
6.0 kN
elephant
elephant
Fig. 4.1
In the space below, draw a scale vector diagram to determine the magnitude of the resultant
force. Label the two forces applied and the resultant, and clearly state the scale you use.
magnitude of resultant force = ...........................................................[3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15

7
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows another elephant pushing horizontally against a vehicle with a force of 11 kN at
a distance 1.8 m above the ground. Point M is the centre of mass of the vehicle.
elephant
vehicle
11 kN
M
1.8 m
A
1.25 m
Fig. 4.2
(i) Calculate the moment about point A of the force exerted by the elephant.
moment = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the vehicle is 1900 kg, and it does not slide when pushed by the elephant.
Determine whether the elephant tips the vehicle over. Show your working.
calculation
conclusion .....................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

8
5 (a) X and Y are liquid-in-glass thermometers. The scale of each thermometer starts at 0 °C.
X has a large range, good linearity and high sensitivity.

Y has a small range, poor linearity and low sensitivity.
Explain what is meant by
(i) the difference in their ranges,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the difference in their linearities,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(iii) the difference in their sensitivities.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A thermocouple is used to measure the temperature of a small volume of liquid.
(i) Draw and label a sketch of the arrangement.
[3]
(ii) The temperature of the liquid is changing rapidly.
Explain why the thermocouple is able to respond quickly to this rapid change.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15
9
6 (a) In the space below, draw a simple labelled diagram of the apparatus used to demonstrate
Brownian motion.
[2]
(b) State what is observed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain what is observed in terms of molecules.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

10
7 Sound from a loudspeaker is travelling in air towards a solid wall.
Fig. 7.1 shows compressions of the incident sound wave and the direction of travel of the wave.
P 8.5 m Q
wall
direction of
travel
compressions
Fig. 7.1
(a) State what is meant by a compression.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The distance from point P to point Q is 8.5 m. It takes 25 ms for the compression at P to
reach Q.
For this sound wave, determine
(i) the wavelength,
wavelength = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the frequency.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(c) As it strikes the wall, the sound reflects.
Complete Fig. 7.1 to show the positions of three compressions of the reflected sound wave.
[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15

11
(d) The loudspeaker is immersed in water, where it continues to produce sound of the same
frequency.
State and explain how the wavelength of the sound wave in water compares with the
wavelength determined in (b)(i).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

12
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 is a ray diagram of a convex lens being used as a magnifying glass to produce a
virtual image.
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1,
(i) label the object O,
(ii) label the image I,
(iii) label a principal focus F,
(iv) put arrows on the two rays to indicate their directions.

[4]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15

13
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a ray of light in air incident on an interface with glass. The refractive index of
glass is 1.5.
glass
air
incident ray
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, accurately draw the ray as it travels in the glass. You will need to take a
measurement from Fig. 8.2 and carry out an appropriate calculation. Show your working.
[3]
[Total: 7]

14
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows the symbol for a logic gate.
Fig. 9.1
(i) State the name of this gate.
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 9.1, clearly label an input and an output.

[2]
(b) In the space below, draw the symbol for a fuse.
[1]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a circuit.
A
6V
Fig. 9.2
Component A is not emitting light. It only emits light when the p.d. across it is greater than 1 V.
(i) A change to the environment around component B causes component A to emit light.
State the environmental change.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15

15
(ii) Explain your answer to (i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) The combined resistance of the two resistors shown in Fig. 9.3 is 4.0 Ω.
6.0 1
Fig. 9.3
Calculate the resistance of resistor R.
resistance of R = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

16
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the gap between the N-pole and the S-pole of a magnet.
N S
Fig. 10.1
The magnetic field in the gap is uniform.
On Fig. 10.1, draw four field lines to show the pattern and direction of the magnetic field in the
gap. [2]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a horizontal copper wire PQ between two opposite magnetic poles.
N S
A
copper
wire P
Fig. 10.2
A circuit is made by connecting a sensitive digital ammeter between P and Q. The wire PQ is
then moved vertically downwards.
(i) State and explain what is observed on the ammeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15

17
(ii) State what is observed on the ammeter when PQ is moved
1. vertically downwards at a greater speed,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
2. vertically upwards at the same speed as in 1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

18
11 (a) The counter of a radiation detector placed close to a radioactive source gives a count rate of
1600 counts / s. The half-life of the source is 1 week.
Ignoring background radiation, calculate the count rate
(i) 1 week after the first measurement,
count rate = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) 3 weeks after the first measurement.
count rate = ...........................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows the arrangement for an experiment to investigate the shielding of radioactive
sources.
position of thick card 5 mm steel 20 cm lead

samples
A B C D E
20 cm air
Samples containing three different radioactive sources are placed, one at a time, in the
position shown.
The table shows the count rates when a radiation detector is placed at the positions A to E.
Complete the table to indicate whether α-particles, β-particles or γ-rays are emitted from each
sample.
A B C D E type of radiation emitted

sample 1 high high high high low
sample 2 high high low 0 0
sample 3 high 0 0 0 0
[3]
(c) State which type of radiation, α, β or γ, is the most strongly ionising.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/32/O/N/15

* 8 9 5 1 8 1 4 3 3 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/33
1 hour 15 minutes
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.

DC (CW/SW) 96032/2
2
1 A plastic ball is dropped from the balcony of a tall building and falls towards the ground in a straight
line.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the falling ball.
8.0
speed
m/s
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) State and explain, in terms of forces, what is happening to the speed of the ball between time
t = 2.0 s and t = 3.0 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) On Fig. 1.1, mark a point P on the line where the acceleration of the ball is not constant. [1]
(c) Using Fig. 1.1,
(i) calculate the acceleration of the ball between t = 0 s and t = 0.25 s,
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) estimate the distance that the ball falls in the first 3.0 s.
distance = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/O/N/15
3
2 A student has 500 identical, rectangular sheets of paper. The mass of 1.0 m2 of the paper is
0.080 kg.
(a) Using a metre rule, she measures the length of one sheet of paper and its width. The length is
0.300 m and the width is 0.210 m.
(i) Calculate the mass of one sheet of paper.
mass = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) The student makes a single pile of the 500 sheets of paper.
With a metre rule, she measures the height of the pile. The height of the pile is 0.048 m.
Calculate the density of the paper.
density = ...........................................................[3]
(b) A second student has only 5 sheets of the same type of paper.
Suggest how this student determines the density of the paper to a similar accuracy. Additional
apparatus may be used.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows part of the extension-load graph for a spring.
extension / cm
3.0
B
A
0
0 12.0
load / N
Fig. 3.1
The spring obeys Hooke’s law between points A and B.
(a) (i) On Fig. 3.1, complete the graph between A and B. [1]
(ii) State the name of point B.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The average value of the load between A and B is 6.0 N.
Calculate the work done in extending the spring from A to B.
work done = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/O/N/15

5
(c) The spring has an unstretched length of 4.0 cm.
An object is hung on the spring and the spring length increases from 4.0 cm to 6.0 cm.
(i) Calculate the mass of the object.
mass = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) The object is immersed in a liquid but remains suspended from the spring.
The liquid exerts an upward force on the object and the length of the spring decreases
to 5.0 cm.
Calculate the upward force exerted on the object by the liquid.
upward force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

6
4 A soft rubber ball of mass 0.15 kg is dropped, in a vacuum, from a height of 2.0 m on to a hard
surface. The ball then bounces.
(a) State the main energy changes taking place when
(i) the ball is falling,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the ball hits the surface and is changing shape,
...........................................................................................................................................
(iii) the ball is regaining its shape and is rising from the surface.
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Calculate the speed with which the ball hits the surface.
speed = .......................................................... [4]
(c) After rebounding from the surface, the ball rises to a height of 1.9 m.
Suggest why the height to which the ball rises is less than the height from which the ball falls.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/O/N/15

7
5 (a) State two examples of physical properties that vary with temperature and that may be used
for the measurement of temperature.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) When first manufactured, a liquid-in-glass thermometer has no scale markings.
(i) Describe the procedure needed to determine
1. the position on the thermometer of the lower fixed point,
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
2. the position on the thermometer of the upper fixed point.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Explain why
1. the graduations marked on the thermometer between the fixed points are spaced
equally,
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. the expansion of the glass of the thermometer is ignored.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

8
6 A dolphin produces a sound wave in water of frequency 7800 Hz.
Fig. 6.1 represents rarefactions of the sound wave travelling in the water and hitting the side of a
wooden ship at an angle.
water wood
A B
direction of wave travel
rarefactions
Fig. 6.1
(a) State what is meant by a rarefaction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, two rarefactions A and B are labelled. The distance between rarefaction A and
rarefaction B is 0.76 m.
Determine
(i) the wavelength in water of the sound wave,
wavelength = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the time taken for the rarefaction at A to reach the point where rarefaction B is now
positioned.
time = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/O/N/15

9
(c) The sound wave passes from the water into the wood where the speed of sound is greater.
State what happens to
(i) the frequency,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the wavelength.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) On Fig. 6.1, sketch the positions in the wood of the three incomplete rarefactions. [2]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) The refractive index of a type of glass is 1.6.
Calculate the critical angle for light in this type of glass.
critical angle = ...........................................................[3]
(b) A waterproof laser is immersed in water. Fig. 7.1 shows the laser shining light up towards the
horizontal surface of the water.
air
water normal
e
beam of light
movement of laser
laser
Fig. 7.1
Initially, the angle θ is much less than the critical angle for this light in water.
The laser moves and θ gradually increases until it is much greater than the critical angle.
Describe, for different angles of the laser, what happens to the light beam after it hits the
surface.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/O/N/15
11
8 A metal sphere, mounted on an insulating plastic stand, is positively charged.
(a) State the name of the unit in which electric charge is measured.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A smaller metal sphere, also mounted on an insulating plastic stand, is uncharged.
This smaller sphere is moved close to the positively charged sphere. Fig. 8.1 shows the two
spheres.
positively
charged
sphere
smaller
sphere
plastic
stands
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, draw the distribution of charge on the smaller sphere. [2]
(ii) An earthed metal wire is touched against the smaller metal sphere.
State and explain what happens to the charge on the smaller sphere.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain, in terms of their structures, why the metal wire is an electrical conductor but the
plastic stand is an electrical insulator.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

12
9 (a) Place one tick in each row of the table to indicate one use of a thermistor and one use of a
transistor.
magnetic
heat light
field rectifier switch
detector detector
detector
thermistor
transistor
[2]
(b) In Fig. 9.1, lamp A is not glowing brightly.
6V
Fig. 9.1
Suggest and explain what could be done to component B to make lamp A glow brightly.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/O/N/15

13
10 The output of an a.c. generator in a power station is 5000 V.
A transformer increases the voltage to 115 000 V before the electrical power is transmitted to a
distant town.
(a) State and explain, using a relevant equation, one advantage of transmitting electrical power
at a high voltage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The transformer contains two coils, the primary coil and the secondary coil.
(i) State the other main component of a transformer and the material from which it is made.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the component in the transformer to which the a.c. generator is connected.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) There are 400 turns on the primary coil of the transformer.
Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Transformers within the town reduce the voltage to 230 V.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

14
11 Uranium-238 and uranium-234 are radioactive isotopes of the element uranium.
A uranium-238 nucleus is different from a uranium-234 nucleus but both decay by the emission of
an α-particle.
(a) (i) In terms of the particles in each, state how a nucleus of uranium-238 differs from a
nucleus of uranium-234.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Although the two nuclei are different, they are both nuclei of uranium.
State a property that makes these isotopes the same element.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) When α-particles pass through air, they are more strongly ionising than β-particles.
Suggest two reasons why this is so.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) In an experiment, α-particles are allowed to strike a thin gold foil in a vacuum.
Almost all the α-particles pass straight through the gold undeflected. Only a very small
number of α-particles are deflected from their original path.
This result reveals certain features of the atoms of the gold.
State what is shown about atoms by the fact that
(i) most α-particles pass straight through the gold undeflected,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) some α-particles are deflected back the way they came.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/O/N/15

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/O/N/15

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/33/O/N/15

P.4 2015 - 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P.4 2015 - 2020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P.4 2015 - 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cambridge IGCSE™

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

(a) Calculate the acceleration of the rocket.

acceleration = ........................................................ [2]

height = ........................................................ [2]

On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for this motion. [3]

impulse = ........................................................ [3]

(b) (i) Define impulse in terms of force and time.

force = ........................................................ [2]

force = ........................................................ [2]

circular area swept out

(i) Calculate the speed of the air.

speed = ........................................................ [3]

input power = ........................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

(i) Calculate the output power of the generator.

output power = ........................................................ [2]

(ii) Calculate the efficiency of the wind turbine.

efficiency = .................................................... % [2]

(c) The density of air is 1.3 kg / m3.

volume = ........................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20 [Turn over

4 (a) Define the specific latent heat of fusion of a substance.

The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.

(i) the specific heat capacity of water

specific heat capacity = ........................................................ [2]

(ii) the mass of ice added to the water.

mass = ........................................................ [3]

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a car on a sunny day in a hot country.

dull black dull white shiny black shiny white

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20 [Turn over

deep water shallow water

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20 [Turn over

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20 [Turn over

8 Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit.

(a) Calculate the reading on the ammeter.

ammeter reading = ........................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

Calculate the resistance of the circuit.

resistance = ........................................................ [4]

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20 [Turn over

(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit.

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

Describe the magnetic effect of this alternating current.

State what quantity is induced in the base of the pan.

(c) The pan contains water.

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20 [Turn over

Two isotopes of helium are helium-3 and helium-4.

Helium-3 has a proton number of 2 and a nucleon number of 3.

Helium-4 has a nucleon number of 4.

Complete Table 11.1 for neutral atoms of these isotopes of helium.

mass compared to a neutral

© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.